- İYTE Kütüphanesi

İSTANBUL BİLGİ UNIVERSITY
GUIDE TO WRITING ACADEMIC PAPERS
AND DISSERTATIONS
Deniz Şengel
2002
Acknowledgments
More than anything else, this book is the product of a communal effort
involving all of İstanbul Bilgi University. It owes much to two group efforts:
Sally Campbell, Selim Eyüboğlu, Elif Kalaycı, Rânâ Tekcan, and Lami Bertan
Tokuzlu were the members of the Bilgi Writing Committee who, in 1999, wrote
the “User’s Guide to Writing Academic Papers.” In November 2000, Sally
Campbell updated the “User’s Guide” following discussions by the University
Ad-hoc Committee chaired by Professor Aydın Uğur and comprised of Yeşim
Burul, Sally Campbell, Turgut Derman, Selim Eyüboğlu, Aybike Hatemi, and
myself. An equally important source is the 1998 “Dissertation Guide” prepared
over the years by Elif Kalaycı and Turgut Derman, under the supervision of
Professor Beyza Furman, for the Faculty of Economic and Administrative
Sciences. The present Guide incorporates their precept and example.
This Guide would not have come into being but for the invaluable
contributions of faculty including Beyza Furman, Cemal Bali Akal, Hale Bolak
Boratav, Yasemin Saner Gönen, Alpaslan Parlakçı, Turgut Derman, and Fırat
Kaya who read and contributed to segments of the Guide relevant to their
disciplines and beyond. Aslı Tunç of the Faculty of Communication read the
entire document at a recent stage and contributed valuable constructive
criticism. Zeynep Avcı was always there with her technological know-how and
editorial experience. Seda Ergül cheerfully enlightened the mystifying aspects
of requirements for music students. Serdar Kâtipoğlu and Fahri Aral were as
always generous with their experience as librarian and publisher, respectively.
N. Kıvılcım Yavuz typed and proof-read most of the document. She also
assisted İsmet Mazlumoğlu of the İstanbul Bilgi University Library, to whom
acknowledgment is due for his scrupulous work in preparing the manuscript for
electronic publication. Numerous students from different faculties of the
University used the manuscript while it was in preparation, and alerted to those
spots that needed clarification and elaboration.
Professor Aydın Uğur patiently oversaw each step in the development of the
document over a period of nearly two years, bringing his knowledge and
experience to it. His commitment to the production of this document was
equalled by that of Rector Lâle Duruiz, who always made time to answer even
the slightest question and oversaw the project to its conclusion.
Deniz Şengel
i
Table of Contents
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Introduction...........................................................................................................…1
The Dissertation……………………………………………………..…….......…...2
Responsibilities of the Writer...............................................................................…2
Choosing the Dissertation Topic and Supervisor.....................................................4
Submitting and Presenting the Dissertation..........................................................…4
Preparation................................................................................................................6
6.1
Finding a Topic............................................................................................6
6.2
Focusing the Topic.......................................................................................6
6.3
Verifying the Feasibility of the Topic..........................................................7
6.4
Determining an Approach............................................................................8
6.5
Finding a Working Title...............................................................................9
6.6
Generating the Argument.............................................................................9
6.6.1 The Brainstorming Phase...........................................................….9
6.6.2 Formulating the Thesis Statement................................................10
6.7
Proposal and Bibliography.........................................................................12
6.7.1 Writing the Proposal.....................................................................12
6.7.2 Bibliography; Annotated Bibliography.........................................13
Parts of an Academic Paper or Dissertation............................................................18
7.1
Parts of an Academic Paper or Dissertation: Preliminary Pages...............19
7.1.1 Title Page......................................................................................19
7.1.1.1 Title Page of a Paper……………………………………19
7.1.1.2 Title Page of the Dissertation…………………………..20
7.1.2 Approval Page for the Dissertation...............................................20
7.1.3 Abstract.........................................................................................21
7.1.4 Dedication……………………………………..…………..….....21
7.1.5 Acknowledgments.........................................................................22
7.1.6 Preface……………...………………….......……………..……...22
7.1.7 Table of Contents..........................................................................22
7.1.8 List of Tables, List of Figures or List of Illustrations,
List of Symbols and/or Abbreviations..........................................23
7.2
Parts of an Academic Paper or Dissertation: The Text.........……....…….24
7.2.1 The Introduction: The Statement and Rationale of the Problem;
Purpose of Study; Design of the Investigation; Description of
Approach........…………………………………………......…….24
7.2.2 Measurement Techniques Used and Results……………….........25
7.2.3 Review of the Literature………………....………….........….….25
7.2.4 Main Body: Discussion and Demonstration of the Argument .....28
7.2.5 Conclusion or Summary…………………………………...........28
7.3
Parts of an Academic Paper or Dissertation: The Reference Material.......29
7.3.1 Appendices…………………………………………………..….29
7.3.2 Bibliography, Works Cited, List of References........……....…...29
Aspects of the Text…………………………………………….………..….…….29
8.1
Chapter Divisions…………………..........……………….…......……….29
8.2
Illustrative Material……………………………………....………….…..30
8.3
Formulas…………………………………………………….………...…35
8.4
Forms of Using Source Material................................................................35
8.4.1 Quotations…………………………………………………….....36
8.4.2 Summary and Paraphrase........................………………………..37
ii
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
8.4.3 Plagiarism.....................................................................................38
Form and Appearance...………………………………….…………………….…39
9.1
Paper……………………………………………..……………………....39
9.2
Font, Size, Type………………………………..….……………………..39
9.3
Print…………………………………………..…….…………………….40
9.4
Spacing……………………………………..……….…………………....40
9.5
Margins…………………………………..………….…………………....41
9.6
Word and Text Division………………...……………………………......41
9.7
Pagination……………………………...………………………………....42
9.8
Binding……………………………...………………………………........42
9.9
Submitting Electronic Copy of the Dissertation........................................43
Revising: Proofreading and Editing…….......……………………………………43
10.1
How to Proofread…….......……………………………………………..44
10.2
Editing Checklist…….......……………………………………………...45
10.3
Hyphens…….......……………………………………………………….50
Documentation Styles.......................................................……………………….51
Documentation Styles Used at İstanbul Bilgi University.……………………….52
İstanbul Bilgi University Style for the Humanities...............................................53
13.1
Quotations.………………………..……………………….…………….53
13.1.1 Short and Long Quotations……………………………………..53
13.1.2 Punctuating Quotations…………………………………………55
13.1.3 Integrating Quotations into Text..................................................57
13.1.4 Quoting Foreign-Language Text and Indicating Translations.....58
13.1.5 Quoting Literary Texts and Philosophical Dialogues..................61
13.1.6 Double And Single Quotation Marks…………………………...62
13.2
Bibliography..............................................................................................63
13.2.1 The Form of an Entry for a Book.................................................64
13.2.1.1 Book with a Single Author…...……….…………...…..65
13.2.1.2 Two or More Books by the Same Author.......................66
13.2.1.3 Book by More Than One Author....................................67
13.2.1.4 Book by More Than Three Authors................................68
13.2.1.5 Book with a Corporate (Group) Author..........................68
13.2.1.6 One Volume of a Multi-Volume Work...........................69
13.2.1.7 Book with No Author......................................................70
13.2.1.8 Book with a Translator....................................................71
13.2.1.9 An Edited Book...............................................................72
13.2.1.10 Book with Multiple Translators...................................74
13.2.1.11 Book with Multiple Editors.........................................75
13.2.1.12 Book with an Editor and a Translator..........................75
13.2.1.13 Book with an Introduction...........................................76
13.2.1.14 Book with Repeated and Revised Editions.................77
13.2.2 Citing Part of a Book…………………………………….............78
13.2.2.1 Chapter or Article in One-Author Book.........................78
13.2.2.2 Chapter or Article in Edited Volume..............................79
13.2.2.3 Essay in a Reference Work; Entry in a Dictionary or
Encyclopaedia................................................................79
iii
14
13.2.2.4 An Introduction, Preface, Foreword, or Afterword........80
13.2.2.5 Literary Work in a Volume of Collected Works.......….81
13.2.2.6 Cross-Referencing.........................................................81
13.2.3 The Form of an Entry for a Periodical Publication......................82
13.2.3.1 Article in an Academic Journal.....................................82
13.2.3.2 Signed Article in a Magazine.........................................83
13.2.3.3 Unsigned Article in a Magazine.....................................84
13.2.3.4 Newspaper Article..........................................................84
13.2.4 Electronic Sources.........................................................................85
13.2.4.1 Online Journal and Magazine Articles...........................85
13.2.4.2 Online Databases............................................................86
13.2.4.3 Web Page........................................................................87
13.2.4.4 CD-ROM........................................................................88
13.2.4.5 Electronic-Mail (e-mail)….............................................88
13.2.4.6 Online Posting or Bulletin Board Posting......................89
13.2.4.7 Computer Software........................................................89
13.2.5 Media Other Than the Electronic......…………….......................90
13.2.5.1 Television and Radio Programmes................................90
13.2.5.2 Sound Recording...........................................................90
13.2.5.3 Film................................................................................91
13.2.5.4 Filmstrips, Slide Programmes, and Videotapes.............92
13.2.5.5 Performance...................................................................92
13.2.5.6 Musical Composition.....................................................93
13.2.5.7 Work of Art....................................................................93
13.2.5.8 Advertisement................................................................94
13.2.6 Other Printed Sources..................................................................95
13.2.6.1 Published Letter.............................................................95
13.2.6.2 Government Publication................................................95
13.2.6.3 Pamphlet........................................................................96
13.2.7 Unpublished Sources..............................................................….96
13.2.7.1 Unpublished Interview Conducted by the Author....….96
13.2.7.2 Unpublished Letter.....................................................…96
13.2.7.3 Unpublished Lectures.................................................…97
13.2.7.4 Dissertations……………………………………………97
13.2.8 Title Within a Title………………………………………………97
13.2.9 Manuscript Sources……………………………………………...98
13.3
Footnotes and Endnotes……………… …..............................................100
13.3.1 Form for Citing a Book...............................................................103
13.3.2 Form for Citing a Part of a Book...........................................….105
13.3.3 Form for Citing a Periodical Publication...................................106
13.3.4 Form for Citing an Electronic Source........................................107
13.3.5 Form for Citing Media Other Than the Electronic.....................108
13.3.6 Form for Citing Unpublished Sources........................................110
13.3.7 Form for Citing Manuscript Sources…………………………..111
İstanbul Bilgi University Style for the Sciences and Social Sciences...................112
14.1
Citing In-Text…………………………………………………..............112
14.2
Short Quotations…………………………………………………..........118
14.3
Long Quotations…………………………………………………..........119
14.4
Notes…………………………………………………............................120
14.5
The List of References………………………………………………….120
14.6
Preparing the List of References in Psychology………………………..122
iv
14.6.1 Books…………………………………………………............. 122
14.6.2 Articles and Parts of Books……………………………............124
14.6.3 Work Discussed in a Secondary Source……………………….127
14.6.4 Electronic Sources………………………………......................127
14.7
Preparing the List of References in Sociology…………………………128
14.7.1 Books and Reports...…………………………………...............128
14.7.2 Periodicals………………………………………………....…..129
14.7.3 Public Documents……………………………......................…130
14.7.4 Unpublished Sources……………………………......................130
14.8
Preparing the List of References in the Economic and Administrative
Sciences, Computer Science, and Mathematics…………......................130
14.8.1 Books………………………………………………….............130
14.8.2 Articles or Chapters in Books………………..……...........…...131
14.8.3 Periodicals………………………………………......................132
15 Appendices……………………………………………………………………….…133
A. Dissertation Student Follow-Up Form……………………………..133
B. Dissertation Topic Approval Form......................…………..………135
C. Dissertation Grade Form......................…………..………….…......138
D. Dissertation Title Page.........................................…………..……...140
E. Dissertation Approval Page.................................…………..………145
F. Sample Abstracts.............………………………………….………152
G. Sample Acknowledgments..................................…………..……....158
H. Samples of the Table of Contents........................…………..…........161
I. Samples of the List of Tables……………………………………....170
J. Samples of the List of Illustrations and List of Figures…………....171
K. Samples of the List of Symbols and/or Abbreviations……………..175
L. Sample Bibliography in the Humanities Style..................................178
M. Sample Works Cited Lists in the Humanities Style..........................186
N. Sample List of References in the Social Science Style: Psychology189
O. Sample List of References in the Social Science Style: Sociology...191
P. Dissertation Topics from Previous Years………………………….193
16 Bibliography of Works Quoted and Consulted in the Preparation of This Guide…..199
16.1
Works Quoted…………………………………………………………..199
16.2
Works Consulted……………………………………………………….200
Index………………………………………………………………………………..202
v
1.
Introduction
The present document is the University’s Guide to Writing Academic Papers
and Dissertations and describes the process of producing an academically valid
paper or dissertation. It takes the student from the stage of initial research and the
locating of a topic to the final production of the work. It provides specific examples
for every stage it discusses. This Guide should help you with your approach to
academic writing in English or Turkish as well as identifying features that are
accepted as University rules and standards. All students are expected to comply
with these rules and standards.
Just as your research must be accurate and complete to meet your
Department’s and discipline’s standards, the presentation of that research must be
equally accurate and complete to meet İstanbul Bilgi University standards. Hence
this Guide also includes detailed instruction concerning word-processing format
and documentation. It contains guidelines concerning the ethical and formal aspects
of academic writing as well as for the material preparation of final copy.
Departments at Bilgi offer the option of submitting a Graduation Project in place of
the dissertation. In most departments, the Graduation Project too consists of written
work that is not a ‘dissertation’ in the strict sense of the term but entails similar
processes that range from locating a topic to producing the material aspect of the
work. The stages of the process ranging from identifying a field of inquiry to the
material production and submission of the work to your Faculty described in this
Guide are applicable to all written work submitted for graduation in any
programme. A number of departments at Bilgi also offer programmes or options
requiring graduation projects that involve submitting work in form other than
writing. Examples include programmes in the Department of Music, the
Department of Film and Television, the Department of Visual Communication
Design, and the Department of the Management of Performance Arts. Guidelines
for submitting work in media other than writing may be obtained from the relevant
department.
The Guide has been designed for use by students at İstanbul Bilgi University at
all levels. While you will be making thorough use of it when working on your
dissertation or graduation project, it is most advisable to familiarise yourself with
1
the contents of the Guide soon upon starting at Bilgi. In work submitted for your
courses, your instructors will expect you to comply with the rules of academic
writing and presentation set forth herein.
2.
The Dissertation
The dissertation is an important feature of education at İstanbul Bilgi
University and its crucial role is stressed from the outset. The preparation and
presentation of the dissertation and the study of a topic in considerable depth
should enhance analytical and evaluative capacity while developing self-confidence
and independence.
The principal criteria for the assessment of any dissertation written at Bilgi is
its presentation, content and originality, and evidence of the following:
• awareness of the multiple facets of the issues studied;
• familiarity with the major research findings in the area studied;
• in the social sciences, facility in methods used in field studies and the systematic
organisation and interpretation of available and collected data;
• in the sciences and humanities, competence in theoretical and methodological
developments in the area;
• in the arts, awareness and creative use of current technique, technology, and
intellectual and aesthetic issues;
• awareness of the social, political, economic, and cultural environment on both
national and international levels, as these impinge upon the particular dissertation
topic.
3.
Responsibilities of the Writer
If you are submitting a paper or dissertation as your own research, you have
the responsibility to present your own findings and ideas. Academic writing does
not consist of piecing together ideas or words of others, not even when these are
documented. Though a paper or dissertation is not routinely expected to attain
groundbreaking originality, it is nevertheless expected to reflect entirely your work
and the results of independent research, investigation, and reflection. The academic
paper or dissertation, like any other type of meaningful writing, is the result of an
individual process of discovery. What sense of discovery or accomplishment can
there be if you do not thoughtfully study the information you gather during
research and make it your own?
2
How do you make research your own? First, gain control over the information
you plan on using in your writing. Understand thoroughly the sources you are
using. If you do not understand a particular source, get help clarifying it. If for
some extreme reason you cannot get that help, it is best not to use at all a source
you do not understand. Consider points in which your sources agree and disagree
on related issues, and decide which ones offer the best arguments for your
purposes. Articulate why you think these best. Then determine how these findings
stand up to your own thinking. Also try to formulate why you are not convinced by
those you do not classify among the best arguments. This is when research
becomes meaningful and your own: when you have mastered your sources, are
clear about which ones you agree or disagree with, and thus know where you stand
in relation to others who have worked on the same topic before you.
Academic writing becomes vital and meaningful above all when you have
picked a topic about which you are genuinely curious and feel driven to make
discoveries in it. Only then will you feel the kind of commitment that is necessary
for undertaking significant research and reflection. This is as valid for papers
written for coursework as it is for the dissertation.
Foremost among the responsibilities of an academic writer is also the effective
planning of time. Plan your time well and prepare for yourself a working schedule
for reading and research, and for writing the paper or dissertation. For papers in
courses, you will be given deadlines at which work must be submitted. As for the
dissertation, your Department or Faculty will specify a deadline for turning in final
copy of the dissertation as well as interim stages of work: since the composition of
the dissertation is a drawn-out process involving an entire academic year, you will
receive a calendar as part of your syllabus for the Dissertation Course. The
coordinator of the Dissertation Course in your Department and your dissertation
supervisor will aid you in the effective planning of time by supplying a solid
schedule. They will also discuss stages of work specific to your field and topic. See
Appendix A for a copy of the “Dissertation Student Follow-Up Form” which
coordinators and supervisors at Bilgi use for individual scheduling.
Thus in addition to mastery over your sources, responsible writing depends on
genuine interest in your topic and commitment to the subject of your research, and
3
on effective planning and giving yourself enough time to develop your work
thoroughly.
4. Choosing the Dissertation Topic and Supervisor
Dissertation areas and supervisors assigned in the various departments will be
announced by the departments on the registration date. Students officially may
select their supervisors and topics after the first week of registration and discuss
their decision with the Head of the Department or the coordinator of the
Dissertation Course. In departments where dissertations also have a second reader,
the Head of the Department will assign the Second Reader of the dissertation.
Subsequently, students fill out the “Dissertation Topic Approval Form,” which is
available from the coordinator of the Dissertation Course in your Department or
Faculty. For the “Dissertation Topic Approval Form,” see Appendix B below. This
form will include the title of the topic selected, the name and signature of the
supervisor, and the name, identification number and signature of the student. It will
also include the name of the Second Reader, if applicable, as well as the name and
signature of the Coordinator of the Dissertation Course. The coordinator of the
Dissertation Course, the supervisor, and the student will each keep a copy. Your
Department will have a deadline for turning in this form. It is your responsibility to
find out, from the coordinator of the Dissertation Course, what that deadline is.
Students who do not return this form to the coordinator by the specified
deadline cannot continue with the dissertation study for that year.
5.
Submitting and Presenting the Dissertation
The responsibility for the quality of content and the correctness of form of the
dissertation lies with the student and the supervising faculty member. This includes
ensuring that the research and written work is the student’s own work, is of high
professional quality, and meets applicable academic standards. The Head of the
Department offering the degree is responsible for ensuring that the dissertations
meet the standards established by the University.
The student may be given ongoing evaluations of the dissertation by his/her
supervisor as various sections, chapters, and drafts of the work are completed.
4
However, final approval may be given only to the completed document. Also, the
dissertation supervisor must meet with the student at least once a week to follow up
on the student’s progress. Of the final draft of the dissertation, the student will
submit two unbound copies to the supervisor for final review. The supervisor will
convey one of the copies to the Second Reader. This is when the Second Reader
will make requests for revision, if any.
Some departments and Faculties at Bilgi require students to ‘present’ or
‘defend’ the completed dissertation. Some departments require a presentation of the
dissertation topic, before the student begins the writing stage. Find out from the
coordinator of the Dissertation Course if your Department or Faculty is among
these. If your Department or Faculty requires the student to defend (orally present)
his/her dissertation, two copies of the completed dissertation in final form (which
may be subject to minor corrections after the defense), together with two copies of
the abstract, must be submitted to the dissertation supervisor on the date announced
by the Department or Faculty. (These two copies submitted are most likely not the
same two copies you will have submitted earlier to your supervisor.)
Following the presentation, the dissertation supervisor will communicate the
results to the student. In some cases, further revision of the dissertation may be
required by the committee, and the student will be given two extra weeks for the
revision. When the dissertation thus has reached completion, the Dissertation
Grade Form will be filled out and turned in by the Supervisor to the Head of the
Department, together with the dissertation. After the Head of the Department has
reviewed and approved this copy, the dissertation is submitted to the Dean of the
Faculty offering the degree.
The Dean of the Faculty will review the dissertations for compliance with the
general regulations on preparation and will return them for correction if necessary.
Final library copy will not be submitted until the dissertation has been reviewed by
the Dean.
If your Department or Faculty does not require presentation of the dissertation,
your supervisor will turn in the completed dissertation to the Head of the
Department along with the Dissertation Grade Form. After the Head of the
Department has approved the dissertation, the work will be turned in to the Dean of
5
the Faculty for final approval. Upon the Dean’s approval, the Head of the
Department will submit appropriate copy to the University Library.
For a sample of the Dissertation Grade Form, see Appendix C.
6. Preparation
6.1 Finding a Topic
Though frequently you will have to select your own paper topic in a course, in
some cases the topic may be given to you. Even within the constraints of a given
topic, there are always ways to put forward your own vision and approach to the
topic, of finding your own angle and elaborating on it. However, when the paper
topic is given, any diversion from the main subject must be justified and supported.
If you are to choose your own topic, be sure to find one that is of genuine interest
to you. You should also be knowledgeable about the topic; it is senseless to pick a
topic about which you know nothing. Moreover, if your paper topic involves
research, make sure that you will be able to find resources for it. Selecting a subject
of current relevance in your field is also important. These criteria of finding a topic
for a paper are certainly valid for finding a dissertation topic too, though the latter
requires more elaboration.
6.2 Focusing the Topic
Most student writers are too ambitious in the selection of a topic. They
undertake to do too much within the limits of a paper or dissertation. They try to
discuss the general implications of the atom bomb, or the history of mass
production, or the growth of scientific medicine, or the origin and development of
football, or the concept of ‘imitation’ in the history of literature, or the history of
Russo-American relations, or Spain’s neutrality in World War II. The result, at
best, is a series of vague and half-supported generalisations that never come into
focus and inevitably lack meaning. Vagueness will be the result not because issues
such as the above are not worth wondering about, but because you will be working
under constraints of time and permissible writing length, and so on. Within the time
available, you will never be able to do justice to a topic that large and unframed.
6
Experienced writers are constantly aware of the limitations working upon
them. These are above all the limitations dictated by the time and space at their
disposal. Experienced writers reject a subject like Turkish Popular Music, in favour
of one restricted to a single aspect such as, Orhan Gencebay’s Contribution to
Turkish Arabesk Music. They forego a large topic like The History of RussoAmerican Relations for, say, Russo-American Relations on the Eve of World War
II. They focus on Franco’s role in the diplomatic relationships between the Allies
and the Axis rather than engage in an unfocused discourse about Spain’s neutrality.
6.3 Verifying the Feasibility of the Topic
Once you have focused on a topic that is of interest to you and whose current
importance in your field you feel you can justify, you need to do a survey in order
to explore its feasibility. This means first of all seeing whether there is sufficient
material for you to work with. You may find that there is not enough material
available for you to conduct your research and demonstrate your argument.
Secondly, it implies once again seeing whether the subject is sufficiently focused
for you to handle the available material within the given time period and permitted
length of writing. Just as you may find that there is insufficient material available,
you may find that there is so much material already produced on the topic that it is
simply not possible for you to read and process a reasonable portion of it in time
for turning in your assignment. Of course, in some rare cases, insufficiency of
material and research done in your chosen topic may be all the more reason to
pursue that topic in order to fill a gap in your field.
Frequently, the phase of verifying the feasibility of your chosen topic will
involve once again focusing and framing the topic to manageable size. For
example, ‘problems relevant to the writing of Shakespeare’s biography’ or a topic
like ‘the history of debates about Roman Law and Common Law’, or ‘the impact of
violence on television upon children’s behaviour’ are indeed important and valid
topics. However, once you survey the available material, you may find that several
kinds of problems arise which may make it impossible for you to cover the topic in
a reasonable span of time and page length. In the case of the topic concerning
Shakespeare, you will find that there are a vast number of problems concerning the
7
author’s identity that have been debated since the late eighteenth century. Not only
may you not be able to gather all the material in time, but mastering the material
and developing a perspective on it would be a task for many months, if not years.
In the case of the debate concerning Roman Law and Common Law, aside from the
largeness of the body of research available, you may find yourself entangled in
historiographic problems that go well beyond your interest in the legal matter. You
may find that aside from law, you would have to read widely in history before you
can approach the problems pertaining to the law. Regarding the impact of violence
in television shows upon children’s behaviour, you may again find that there is too
much material available that must be studied to make your presentation credible.
But you may also find that the point has been demonstrated rather conclusively and
that research and debate are currently directed at how to solve the problem of
violence on television, how to launch an opposition to such programming. In other
words, your topic may have become obsolete even though it has not lost its
currency.
The feasibility of your topic, and whether or not it is sufficiently focused, will
ultimately become clarified once you have determined your approach. Your
approach to the topic is one major framing factor.
6.4 Determining an Approach
Thus the next step is to determine your approach to the topic. What is
considered a valid approach of course varies from discipline to discipline. By the
time you embark upon your dissertation, you will have learned about the valid
approaches within your discipline in a general framework. But you may also have
to use further (i.e., your own) judgment and bring in further (i.e., your own)
definitions when determining the approach. For example, a topic like ‘Orhan
Gencebay’s Contribution to Turkish Arabesk Music’ could be considered a valid
topic in musicological as well as sociological studies. Thus, alternative approaches
to this topic, such as a sociological approach or an approach based on the form of
Gencebay’s music may be equally applicable. But the topic may be approached
within sociology in terms of Gencebay’s appeal to dolmuş drivers in the 1970s, as
well as in terms of the ethnic appeal of his music from its inception through today.
8
In musicology, the topic may be approached in terms of its roots in traditional
Middle-Eastern music or pitted against the comparative framework of urban cult
music in the late twentieth century.
In brief, in determining the feasibility of your topic and in deciding on your
approach, the following factors have to be kept in mind: the norms of your
discipline as laid out by your Department; availability or non-availability of
material, whether there is too much or too little material; the apparent fruitfulness
of a given topic and the propriety of your particular approach; the background of
the researcher in terms of whether or not he or she is sufficiently prepared to tackle
the topic within the framework of the desired approach.
6.5 Finding a Working Title
After determining topic and approach, decide on a working title for the paper
or dissertation. Do not be sloppy in picking your title simply because it is called a
‘working title’, thinking that you would have the opportunity to change it once you
have completed your writing. The title is an important guide for you. It will help
keep you focused and serve as a reminder of what you are in fact working on. It
will prevent you from wandering off on tangents. It is important that your title
reflect the limitations that have been placed on the subject. A paper discussing the
arms trade should not be entitled simply ‘Arms’ or ‘Arms Trade’. It should say
something specific about your topic, such as ‘Arms Trade and Third-World Debt at
the Beginning of the Twenty-First Century’.
6.6 Generating the Argument
6.6.1
The Brainstorming Phase
Now that you have focused on a topic, determined your approach, found the
supporting material, and have a working title to guide you, it is time to generate
your argument. This process will result in the formulation of a ‘thesis statement’.
An efficient way to start is by brainstorming as you mull over as many sources as
you have been able to gather at this stage. Do not hesitate to spin out a plethora of
ideas. This is a creative phase when you will enhance your ideas, perceiving new
connections and paths of inquiry. But do not linger too long in this stage and once
9
you have caught a glimpse in your imagination of where your topic and approach
will lead you, settle down to ordering your ideas. Now your aim is to frame and
formulate a thesis statement. The thesis statement represents your main argument.
This statement contains the essential point which you are going to prove in your
paper or dissertation.
6.6.2 Formulating the Thesis Statement
The thesis statement will be your most significant guide as you order, re-order,
and arrange thoughts you have so far developed. It sums up in a few sentences the
idea and the purpose of the paper or dissertation you are going to write. The thesis
statement can be as short as a single sentence. It can be as long as a short
paragraph. If you find yourself unable to formulate your thesis succinctly, it may
mean that you do not yet have a thesis. A thesis statement is precise and concise.
Be also aware that a thesis statement is not the declaration of a topic. It is a
statement that indicates what you want to say about that topic. In other words, the
thesis statement does not announce that, ‘In this paper (or dissertation), I will
discuss x’. It will say something about x, such as: ‘X has made a significant impact
on the rural population due to...’.
In the first stages of thinking and writing, your thesis statement will most
likely be somewhat rough. It will emerge and become refined as you think, take
notes, and write. Thus, while you are engaged in research and writing, keep in
mind that eventually you must produce a thesis statement, and work accordingly.
The thesis statement will become part of your Introduction. It is generally located
near the end of the Introduction.
Let us look at concrete examples in order to illustrate what a thesis statement
is, as well as what it is not.
Say, your initial research and reflection on ‘the concept of privacy’ has
suggested a topic like, ‘the comparison of Istanbul residents with migratory
animals’. And researching this topic, you intend to delve into the origins of the
sense and practice of privacy. This is indeed a valid direction of research, but it is
far from constituting a thesis statement. The phrase, ‘comparison of Istanbul
residents with migratory animals’, represents more the kind of initial idea of a
direction of research a writer may have as he or she toys with ideas of a topic to
10
write on. The following, on the other hand, is a thesis statement: ‘A comparison of
Istanbul residents with migratory animals reinforces the idea that the concept of
privacy in humans originated in the territorial life styles of animals.’ The thesis
statement includes the indication of the topic and states what you ultimately intend
to demonstrate regarding that topic.
The following is a thesis statement: ‘Children who are exposed to violence on
television display more aggressive traits in their games’. The following, on the
other hand, is very far from making up a thesis statement: ‘Aggressive children
tend to watch more violent television shows’. This last one is rather the statement
of an impression and contains at least one logical fallacy. It represents a hazy initial
idea that may serve you eventually in developing a thesis topic. Aside from not
complying with the principles of specificity and demonstrability that an academic
paper topic has to possess, it is based on a prejudice; it assumes that some children
are essentially aggressive: how do you decide what constitutes aggressive
behaviour in children? In order to explain how the determining model of aggressive
behaviour is set up, you would first need to write another paper or dissertation
explaining that model. Only then would your topic not be guided by prejudice, and
fulfil scientific criteria. But by then, it will probably also have changed drastically.
In order not to become entangled in fruitless directions of reasoning, which will
only help waste your time, consult with the instructor of the course for which you
are writing the paper, or the coordinator of the Dissertation Course in your
Department, or your dissertation supervisor. But above all, take very seriously the
process of formulating your thesis statement.
If you have trouble getting started with formulating a thesis statement, the first
technique that will help ease the process is to write a ‘purpose statement’. You may
start simply by writing down what you are planning to do in your paper or
dissertation: ‘I plan to analyse the use of foul and offensive language in Turkish
rock music to see if it represents a response to the authoritarian social order’. At
some point, you can turn a purpose statement into a thesis statement. As you think
and write about your topic, you can restrict and refine your argument, finding
words that fully designate the concepts you will employ in your analysis.
11
The first step from a ‘purpose statement’ to a ‘thesis statement’ is to remove
the personal in the purpose statement: ‘This study analyses offensive language in
Turkish rock music in order to investigate whether it represents a response to the
authoritarian social order’. In the meantime, you will have reflected further and
perhaps detected a difference between rock lyrics in the 1980s and those in the
1990s, and decided to focus on the latter: ‘This study analyses offensive language
in Turkish rock music of the 1990s in order to investigate whether it represents a
response to the authoritarian social order’. Eventually, you will have thought
through the topic and can incorporate the result of that investigation: ‘Offensive
language in Turkish rock music of the 1990s represents response to the
authoritarian social order’.
A thesis statement becomes more refined when it situates the thesis in the
context of other work that has been done on the topic: ‘Although most writers on
Turkish rock music in the 1990s have argued that the use of offensive language
represents social mobility, closer examination shows that use of such language
implies critical response to the authoritarian social order’.
Aside from starting out with a purpose statement, you may begin by using
formulas to arrive at a working thesis statement. Here are some formulaic
examples:
•
Although most researches in ___________ have argued that ___________ , closer
examination demonstrates that _________________.
•
X is a result of the combination of ______________ and ______________.
But do remember that these formulas are starting points. You will not have arrived
at a complete thesis statement when you have filled in their blanks.
Ultimately, your thesis statement must be precise and focused. It must contain
an idea or argument which is contestable and which you are going to demonstrate
in your paper or dissertation.
6.7 Proposal and Bibliography
6.7.1 Writing the Proposal
All academic departments at İstanbul Bilgi University require dissertation
12
students to submit a dissertation proposal. But some course instructors may also
request a proposal before you embark upon writing the paper for a course. The
requirements of the latter may vary from the requirements of the proposal for the
dissertation, just as the requirements for the dissertation or academic paper
proposal may vary from discipline to discipline. What will vary are length of the
proposal and type and degree of detail required, as well as the kind of material the
proposal is to contain (referred to as ‘components’ below). Best is of course to
check with your Department and coordinator of the Dissertation Course. But there
are a number of components which proposals universally contain.
These components are: an introductory paragraph (usually written last); the
statement of the topic; the rationale of the topic (the explanation of why this is a
valid, interesting, and important topic); thesis statement; methodological statement
and/or description of approach; limitations upon your topic; bibliography. The
Dissertation Course of your Department will instruct you in the specific
requirements for writing a dissertation proposal in your discipline. Do be aware
that you will be working on your Proposal in the first semester of the Dissertation
Course. It will undergo numerous drafts, which will be read by the coordinator of
the Dissertation Course and/or your dissertation supervisor, depending on the
policy of your Department or Faculty. In general, departments at Bilgi expect to see
an initial draft six to twelve weeks into the first semester. In general, departments
expect students to turn in final draft toward the end of the first semester.
6.7.2
Bibliography; Annotated Bibliography
You have, of course, been engaged in bibliographic research since the very
moment you have known of the task set before you, and you have been collecting,
skimming, reading, and discussing relevant sources, without doing which you
would not have been able to pick your topic or determine your approach. Now, as
you are working on your proposal, is a good time to type up the bibliography you
have settled on and have an orderly view of what items you have on hand and what
is still missing. Do be aware that it is very important to show your bibliography to
your dissertation supervisor at an early stage to see whether he or she wants to add
13
to your list. This way, you will spare yourself the inexpediency of being assigned
new reading at a late stage.
If your instructor requires a proposal for the paper, and certainly for the
dissertation proposal, you need to turn in a bibliographya list of sources to
consult for your paper or dissertationas part of the proposal. If the paper you will
submit for the course does not require a proposal, nevertheless your instructor is
likely to require the bibliography of sources you have consulted for that paper.
Therefore, as you browse in the University Library and beyond, make sure to take
accurate note of the publication information of the sources you consult. The criteria
of accuracy in bibliographic matters—or ‘documentation’, as it is more frequently
termed—are discussed below, in Sections 11-14, in full detail. In order to develop a
sense of the form into which you will eventually cast your list of sources, read the
segments of Sections 11-14 relevant to your discipline before you embark upon
compiling your list of sources.
As you determine your sources, take down the full bibliographic details for
each source. These details are listed below. Not all of the details will be necessarily
applicable for the bibliographic style in all disciplines, but unless you are
thoroughly familiar with the style for your discipline, noting all of the details given
below will save you time.
In the case of a book, ‘bibliographic details’ refers to:
•
•
•
•
•
•
author and/or editor; translator, if applicable
title and subtitle
edition (i.e., whether it is 2nd edition, or 3rd, 4th, etc., and whether it is a
‘revised edition’)
publisher and place of publication
year of publication
year when the book was first published if you have a later or revised
edition
In the case of a journal, magazine and newspaper, ‘bibliographic details’ refers
to:
•
•
•
author of article (magazine and newspaper articles may be unsigned; if so,
make a note of it: ‘no author’); translator, if applicable
title and subtitle of article
title of journal, magazine, or newspaper
14
•
•
•
•
year of publication
volume and issue number of journal or magazine
full date of the newspaper; month or seasonwhichever is givenof
journal or magazine
page numbers where article appears
In the case of an electronic source, ‘bibliographic details’ refers to:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
author and/or editor; translator, if applicable
title of the article
title of electronic journal
year or date of publication
the type of medium (Online, CD-ROM, etc.)
pages or length (‘length’ in electronic sources is frequently indicated in
‘paragraphs’: ¶)
‘available’ statement (www address, supplier and name of electronic
database, e-mail address, etc.)
date when you accessed the electronic source
Your instructor or dissertation supervisor may require that the bibliography be
annotated or written as a ‘Review of the Literature’. The ‘Review of the Literature’
is required for the dissertation and will be discussed under separate heading below.
Non-dissertation students: if and when you are required to prepare a Review of the
Literature in a course, consult the relevant section for dissertation students below.
Most academic departments at Bilgi require dissertation students to submit a
Review of the Literature sometime during the first semester of their dissertation
year. This is a requirement for the first semester of the Dissertation Course. Check
with the coordinator of the Dissertation Course and/or with your dissertation
supervisor when your Department’s deadline for the Review of the Literature is.
An Annotated Bibliography is a bibliography that provides information about
the content of the publications. It is an organised list of sources, each of which is
followed by a brief note, or ‘annotation’. The nature of the information given in the
annotation depends on why you are preparing the Annotated Bibliography. For
example, in a course, your instructor may assign an Annotated Bibliography to
determine the thoroughness of your reading and comprehension of course material.
This kind of Annotated Bibliography will be very different from one that is part of
15
a larger research project or one to be included in a dissertation as a survey of the
literature.
Thus an Annotated Bibliography may aim at one of the following:
demonstrating the quality of your reading and depth of your research; providing
background material and new information for your reader; exploring a topic in
preparation for research; giving your research perspective and relevance.
Depending on for which of these purposes you are writing, your Annotated
Bibliography would be classified as one of the following:
•
•
•
•
Informative: summarises the work, describing the content and focus of the
book or article
Evaluative: tells what you think of the work, recording your reactions to
the source, assessing its strengths and weaknesses, stating why it is helpful
to you or why it is not
Descriptive: tells what is included in the work, suggesting the source’s
usefulness to research and/or evaluating its method, conclusions, or
reliability
Combination: is a combination of the above.
The length of the annotations to works in a bibliography may vary in
conjunction with the purpose of the annotation and the scope of the work reviewed.
The form of an Annotated Bibliography is the same as in a regular
bibliography, typed according to the style your instructor or Department or Faculty
requires. The annotation immediately follows the bibliographic information on the
same line, or it may begin on a new line, two single-space lines below the
publication information. The examples of annotation below apply the Humanities
Style for the bibliographical information. The text of the annotations naturally
apply to all disciplines.
Informative Annotation:
Voeltz, L. M. “Children’s Attitudes Toward Handicapped Peers.” American Journal of
Mental Deficiency 84 (1980): 455-64. As services for severely handicapped children
become increasingly available within neighbourhood public schools, children’s
attitudes toward handicapped peers in integrated settings warrant attention. Factor
analysis of attitude survey responses of 2,392 children revealed four factors
underlying attitudes toward handicapped peers: social-contact willingness, deviance
consequation, and two actual contact dimensions. Results of this study suggest the
modifiability of children’s attitudes and the need to develop interventions to facilitate
social acceptance of individual differences in integrated school settings.
16
Evaluative Annotation:
Hingley, Ronald. Chekhov: A Biographical and Critical Study. London: George Allen &
Unwin, 1950. A classic and excellent biography covering all aspects—private, public,
and artistic—of the author’s life and work. A unique feature of this book is the
Appendix, which has a chronological listing of all English translations of Chekkov’s
short stories.
Descriptive Annotation:
a. Blamires, Alcuin, ed., with Karen Pratt and C. W. Marx. Woman Defamed and Women
Defended: An Anthology of Medieval Texts. Oxford Clarendon Press, 1992. A
nearly exhaustive anthology of selections from primary works in translation,
dating from the earliest Middle Ages to circa 1500. The selections are grouped
thematically and are accompanied by brief introductions discussing the author of
the work from which each selection comes and describing the work in general.
b.
“To Please IMF, Turkey Takes Control of Five More Banks.” Wall Street Journal 11
July 2001. Reports that the Banking Supervisory Board of Turkey has taken
control of several banks in a bid to show its determination to meet International
Monetary Fund criteria aimed at resolving the country’s four-month-old financial
crisis.
c.
Reiss, R.-D., and M. Thomas. Statistical Analysis of Extreme Values. 2nd Ed. with 1
CD-ROM. Basel: Birkhäuser Verlag, 2001. Analyses of examples from
insurance, finance, hydrology, and other fields.
Combination Annotation:
Fisher, Franklin M., ed. Antitrust and Regulation: Essays in Memory of John J. McGowan.
Cambridge, Mass.: MIT Press, 1985. Contains ten articles by different authors on
antitrust law and free-market dynamics that compel mergers. Particularly important
for this paper’s topic are the articles by J. J. Mc Gowan and P. H. Joskow analysing
mergers in terms of whether these serve consolidation of corporate power or economic
progress.
There are three different writing styles from which to choose when writing an
Annotated Bibliography. Consult with your instructor regarding which to use.
Whichever you do choose, be consistent. The telescopic style uses phrases, nonsentences: ‘Very helpful Introduction. Chapters review the research between 1920
and 1961’. ‘Discusses how poverty contributes to deaths in developing countries.
Concern about the difficulties of developing a poverty reduction strategy’. Another
style utilises complete sentences only: ‘The authors hold the conservative view that
SALT cannot halt the slipping nuclear advantage of the United States. They
conclude that the United States needs to reassess its defense policy’. ‘The authors
discuss the laws that govern the formation of multiple images of a scene and some
17
of their applications’. The more formal style utilises the paragraph. Here, the
annotation consists of a full, coherent paragraph. This form is particularly
recommended if the Annotated Bibliography you are preparing will be used
eventually as the basis of a bibliographic essay or Review of the Literature.
7.
Parts of an Academic Paper or Dissertation
Once you have completed the preparatory steps, you will be ready to write the
paper or dissertation. This involves the writing of the main body of your paper or
dissertation where you develop and demonstrate your thesis, as well as producing a
number of auxiliary documents such as a Title Page, an Abstract, Appendices,
Bibliography, etc. Below is a list of parts which the final document is going to
contain. But note that not all research subjects and disciplines require every
single one of the parts enumerated and explained below. This is so even in the
dissertation: while a dissertation in the field of marketing or psychology may have
to include a section devoted to ‘Measurement Techniques Used and Results’, a
dissertation in musical composition, history, or the field of literature will most
probably not. Some items, moreover, like the Abstract, will probably be required
for the dissertation alone and not for any of the papers you write in your courses.
Essentially, think of the dissertation or paper as consisting of the Preliminary
Pages; Introduction, Main Body, Conclusion; Reference Materials.
The list below intends to be exhaustive for the dissertation. Students writing
papers may consult various sections if and as need arises. The order in which parts
are indicated below is also the order of their appearance in the paper or dissertation.
Any revision of this order should be discussed with your coordinator or dissertation
supervisor:
Preliminary Pages
Title Page
Approval Page for the Dissertation
Abstract
Dedication
Acknowledgments
Preface
Table of Contents
List of Tables, List of Figures or List of Illustrations, List of Symbols and/or
Abbreviations
The Text
18
Introduction: The Statement and Rationale of the Problem; Purpose of Study;
Design of the Investigation; Description of Approach
Measurement Techniques Used and Results
Review of the Literature
Main Body: Discussion and Demonstration of the Argument divided into
chapters
Conclusion or Summary
The Reference Materials
Bibliography or Works Cited or References
Appendices
7.1 Parts of an Academic Paper or Dissertation: Preliminary Pages
7.1.1
Title Page
7.1.1.1 Title Page of a Paper
You should check with your instructor whether or not you are to include a
formal title page in papers submitted for a course. Typically, the title page of an
academic paper includes a title that in the fewest words possible adequately
represents the content of the paper; the name of the writer; indication of the
Department and/or Programme the paper was written for; indication of the course it
was written for; instructor’s name; date of submission. Many instructors prefer
having this information typed, in single space, on the upper segment of the first
page of the paper as in the following depiction:
Name and Surname
Faculty of Law
LAW 121, Prof. Dr. __________
23 November 2001
A Nineteenth-Century Approach to Legal Interpretation
19
7.1.1.2 Title Page of the Dissertation
From top to bottom, the title page of the dissertation contains the full name of
the University, the full name of the Faculty to which the dissertation is submitted,
the title of the dissertation, the author’s full name, and finally the city, month and
year of submission. The month and year indicate the date of your degree. The
format of the title page, including spacing, placement, margins, font, type, use of
upper- and lower-case lettering must be exactly as in Appendix D. Appendix D
contains the grid of a dissertation title page for each of the four Faculties granting
the Bachelor’s Degree at Bilgi. For accuracy, download the grid of the title page
for your Faculty from the “Undergraduate Dissertation” section at the University
Website.
Capitalise each word in the title of your dissertation. This rule does not apply
to articles, short prepositions, or conjunctions unless one is the first word of the
title.
On the pagination of the title page, see Section 9.7 below.
The title page will also be inscribed upon the outer face of the binding of the
final, approved copy of the dissertation. For further information, see below, Section
9.8.
7.1.2 Approval Page of the Dissertation
Upon completion and acceptance of the work, the approval page of the
dissertation will carry the signature of the Dissertation Supervisor and the Head of
the Department. Like the dissertation title page, the approval page has a very
specific form that must be strictly and accurately followed. See Appendix E for the
grid for approval pages in each of the four Faculties at Bilgi that grant the
Bachelor’s Degree. Do note that there are two different grids for students in the
Faculty of Economics and Administrative Sciences and the Faculty of Science and
Letters: one is for students studying in departments or programmes that grant the
degree of B.A., the Bachelor of Arts; the other one is for those studying in
departments or programmes that grant the degree of B.Sc., the Bachelor of
Sciences. For accuracy, download the grid of the approval page for your Faculty
from the “Undergraduate Dissertation” section at the University Website. Before
20
printing the grid of the approval page, delete the designations, “Space for Head of
Department’s Signature” and “Space for Supervisor’s Signature.” Leave, in their
place, blank space for the signatures. Type in the name of the Department Head
and the Supervisor where the grid indicates “Head of Department’s Name and
Surname” and “Supervisor’s Name and Surname.”
Capitalise each word in the title of your dissertation. This rule does not apply
to articles, short prepositions, or conjunctions unless one is the first word of the
title. On the pagination of the approval page, see Section 9.7 below.
7.1.3 Abstract
The Abstract gives a succinct prose account of the paper or dissertation,
including a statement of the problem, procedure and methods, results, and
conclusions. All explanatory matter and opinion should be omitted. An abstract is
100-350 words long and must not exceed 350 words. It is usually written after the
dissertation or paper has been completed. The heading Abstract must appear in
bold, centred between the text margins without punctuation, 5 cm. from the top of
the page. The text begins at least three single spaces below the heading. On the
pagination of the abstract, see Section 9.7 below. You will look at and discuss
sample abstracts in your Dissertation Course. For examples in various disciplines,
also see Appendix F.
7.1.4
Dedication
A Dedication is optional. If included, it must appear on a separate page and be
centred between the text margins without punctuation, 5 cm. from the top of the
page. The Dedication page does not have a heading but must have a page number
(see also Section 9.7 below). A dedication may consist of poetry or a fragment of
text which you believe represents particularly well the argument or topic of your
dissertation. Or it may consist of a ‘dedication’ proper, by which an author may
dedicate his or her work to a specific person. Thus the dedication page of Thomas
M. Greene’s book Light in Troy reads: Hector is dead and there’s a light in Troy
(Yeats, “The Gyres”). Cemal Bali Akal’s dedication page in Modern Düşüncenin
Doğuşu reads: Ayşe Balâ’ya. The dedication in İbrahim Toraman’s sociology
dissertation, Nationalism in History Textbooks: A Comparative Study 1960-1980,
21
of 2001 is more elaborate. It reads: “History courses aim to possess students to be
proud of the past. ‘No one is right except us’ has become one of the strong beliefs
shared by large groups of people. Therefore most of the knowledge that has been
imposed upon us, has to be forgotten.” Toraman’s dedication is a quotation from a
secondary source. In this case, one may indicate the source at the bottom of the
dedication page and or place it in the List of References or Bibliography at the end
of the book or dissertation.
7.1.5 Acknowledgments
Acknowledgments are optional. This option provides you the opportunity to
express your gratitude to those persons or institutions that have inspired or helped
you with your research and writing. If used, the Acknowledgments page should
have a heading and use the same spacing as the text (i.e., double spacing or space
and a half). The heading Acknowledgments must appear in bold, centred between
the text margins without punctuation, 5 cm. from the top of the page. The text
begins three single spaces below the heading. For pagination, see Section 9.7
below. Sample Acknowledgments may be found in Appendix G.
7.1.6
Preface
Like the Dedication and Acknowledgments, the Preface is optional. If used, the
Preface page should have a heading and use the same spacing as the text (i.e.,
double spacing or space and a half). The heading Preface must appear in bold,
centred between the text margins without punctuation, 5 cm. from the top of the
page. The text begins three single spaces below the heading.
For the pagination of a preface, see Section 9.7 below.
7.1.7 Table of Contents
The Table of Contents will be rarely needed in the papers you write for your
courses. But it is obligatory in the dissertation. It must list the title of each chapter
and, if applicable, the sections of chapters; Bibliography or Works Cited or
References; if applicable, Appendix or Appendices. Note that the sections that
22
precede the Table of Contents page (Abstract, Acknowledgments, Preface) are not
indicated in the Table of Contents.
Capitalise each word in the title of a chapter. This rule does not apply to
articles, short prepositions, or conjunctions unless one is the first word of the title
or subtitle.
Except in initial letters where applicable, entries in a table of Contents are
lower case. The only exception are the conventions in some areas of the discipline
of law, where, as in the example in Appendix H at the end of this book,
encompassing headings are capitalised.
Every entry in the Table of Contents must have leader dots (as in the Table of
Contents of this Guide) that connect it to its corresponding page number. The page
numbers are listed on the right-hand side of the Table of Contents page.
The wording used for all entries on the Table of Contents page must match
exactly the titles used in the text in wording and typography. Before submitting a
draft to your supervisor, verify that they do.
The heading Table of Contents appears in bold, without punctuation, centred
between the text margins and 5 cm. from the top of the page. The entries begin at
least three single spaces below the heading.
On the pagination of the Table of Contents pages, see Section 9.7 below.
See Appendix H for examples of Tables of Contents from dissertations in
different disciplines.
7.1.8
List of Tables, List of Figures or List of Illustrations, List of
Symbols and/or Abbreviations
The sequence of tables, figures or illustrations and any other visual materials,
as well as of symbols and/or abbreviations that appear in the text are indicated on
preliminary pages specifically designed for this purpose. If you use figures or
illustrations and tables in your dissertation or paper, consult with your supervisor
or the coordinator of the Dissertation Course in your Department whether or not
your lists ought to be combined into a single list. Otherwise each group is listed
separately with its own heading. The list of symbols and/or abbreviations is never
combined with other lists. If included, these lists appear immediately after the
23
Table of Contents. They must list items in the order in which they appear in your
text.
The heading List of Tables appears in bold, centred between the text margins
without punctuation and 5 cm. from the top of the page. The listing begins at the
left margin at least three single spaces below the heading. Each entry must have
exactly the same number and the same caption or title used for a table in the text. If
the caption or title used in the text is too long for exact inclusion in the List of
Tables, you may use an appropriate, intelligible abbreviation. As in the Table of
Contents, the List of Tables must have leader dots connecting entry and the
corresponding page number given on the right-hand side of the page. See Appendix
I for samples of the List of Tables.
The List of Figures or List of Illustrations are essentially governed by the same
rules as those for the List of Tables. If your figures or illustrations include
photographs, you may indicate the photographer’s name here. If you use art work,
this is where you would indicate the museum or collection where the original work
is located. See Appendix J for samples of the List of Illustrations or Figures, and
pages 32-33 below, for further discussion.
If included, the List of Symbols and/or Abbreviations must follow the
conventions for such in your discipline. Do be aware that it is not up to the writer
to decide which titles or terms may be abbreviated in the text, notes, or
bibliography. For reliable guidance in your field, consult with your dissertation
supervisor. See Appendix K for samples from various disciplines. On the
pagination of the pages of lists, see also Section 9.7 below.
7.2 Parts of an Academic Paper or Dissertation: The Text
7.2.1
The Introduction: The Statement and Rationale of the
Problem; Purpose of Study; Design of the Investigation; Description of
Approach
An academic paper or dissertation inevitably begins with an Introduction in
which you first identify the topic and elaborate what the issue is regarding your
topic. As in the dissertation proposal, your first task is to establish the problem and
its validity, and your purpose in undertaking the present study. The Introduction
24
also includes a statement of Objectives, and Hypotheses. If your paper or
dissertation involved field work, this opening part of the Introduction offers an
account of the nature of the research and the reasons for undertaking it. If your
topic is of a more historical, critical, or interpretive nature—if, in other words, your
field and topic are of a discursive nature as in the humanities—your statement and
description of the problem is going to ground the work in critical, interpretive
and/or historical terms and concepts.
A dissertation’s Introduction includes discussion of the design of the
investigation. This consists of the statement and discussion of the hypotheses, and
the theoretical structure in which they will be tested and examined, together with
the methods used. In a discursive (humanities) dissertation, this part consists of a
two-fold discussion: the description and justification of the particular approach
pursued in the dissertation, as well as a discussion of hypotheses and the theoretical
or methodological framework. This includes a description of the order of chapters
and the explanation of the logic of that order.
7.2.2 Measurement Techniques Used and Results
If applicable to your discipline and topic, this section will contain the detailed
description and discussion of testing devices used. It will present data you have
obtained in your research and elaborate arguments supporting their validity and
reliability. It will further contain a discussion of the analysis to be applied to the
results to test the hypotheses.
‘Results’ consists of the presentation, in a logical order, of information and
data upon which a decision can be made to accept or reject the hypotheses. This is
not yet your Conclusion, but a synoptic preview of the conclusions you will draw at
the end of your dissertation. For any questions beyond those you may discuss with
the coordinator of the Dissertation Course in your Department, see the instructor of
the Research Methods course in your Department or Faculty.
7.2.3 Review of the Literature
The form and function of a Review of the Literature may vary from discipline
to discipline and from assignment to assignment. In your Bachelor’s Dissertation,
25
the Review of the Literature is essentially a survey of what you have read
concerning your topic. In disciplines (such as literature and history) where this
distinction is valid, it may include the survey of both primary and secondary
materials. But it includes only those materials that are relevant to your topic. It
does not include sources you have consulted and put aside because they are not
useful to you. Moreover, it does not need to include only work you have read in
conjunction with your dissertation. Relevant sources read in other courses or on
your own at some time or other, may be also included. Though they may not deal
directly with your dissertation topic, material you have perused, which have
influenced your approach and thinking in general may be also included. Generally,
the purpose of a Review of the Literature is to analyse critically a segment of a
published body of knowledge through summary, classification, and comparison of
prior studies, reviews, and theoretical work. It provides an overview of the main
concepts or conceptions in your field and presents how different schools in the field
have approached and explained those concepts or conceptions.
The task of writing the Review is easier than it seems at first. To prepare for
the task, skim through your sources again, thinking about why you find each source
helpful and/or interesting. Or, if you do not like a specific source, think about why
you want to criticise it. Then, try to decide how you can group your sources: how
you can group them depends entirely upon your discipline, your topic, your
approach, and the kinds of material you have gathered. The essential concepts of
your research field will provide the main orientation device. The grouping will
dictate in what order you will review the sources. Sample criteria are qualitative
versus quantitative approaches, conclusions of authors, specific purpose or
objectives, chronology, and numerous others. Deciding on the order in which you
will review your sources is the crux of preparing to write the Review of the
Literature.
In writing the Review of the Literature, address the questions asked above:
why do you find a particular source helpful in relation to your topic? Why do you
find it not so helpful? How has it influenced your approach to the topic? Of course,
not every source you consult has to contribute to your approach and thought. Some
may simply contain a wealth of information or data. In that case, simply state that.
26
The final draft of the Review will, of course, not consist of a series of commentary
about individual items on your reading list. Your individual commentaries will be
integrated into the framework of a unified essay that reflects your overall view
about the literature in your field and displays evidence of critical thought applied to
the publications discussed.
The Review of the Literature essay consists of an introduction, a main body,
and a conclusion. In the introduction, define and identify the general topic, issue, or
area of concern, thus providing an appropriate context for reviewing the literature.
Then point out overall trends in what has been published about the topic, indicating
conflicts in theory, methodology, evidence, and conclusions. Point out gaps in
research and scholarship, or a single problem or new perspective of interest.
Thirdly, establish your point of view, explaining the reason for reviewing the
literature. Explain the sequence you will use in your essay: enumerate the criteria
to be used in analysing and comparing the literature and the organisation of the
Review. If possible, say a few words about the scope of the Review, stating why
certain books, articles, reports, etc. are not included.
In the body of the essay, group your sources according to the common
denominators you have identified in the preparatory stage. Summarise individual
studies, books, articles, etc., with as much or as little detail as each deserves:
remember that the space to allocate to each source in a Review of the Literature
must be in proportion to the importance of that source for the dissertation topic.
In the body of the Review essay, provide the reader with strong introductory or
‘umbrella’ sentences at the beginnings of paragraphs and brief summary sentences
at intermediate points in the review. Think of these summary sentences as brief
responses to the question ‘so what?’ So, why has your reader been reading about
what you think about these particular works? Make sure that you consistently
answer this question even if it means that you occasionally repeat yourself. At the
beginning of each paragraph, provide an explanation of what aspect of the literature
will be presented in that paragraph. Establish links between items in a paragraph
using the kinds of transitions given in Section 10.1 g below.
In the conclusion of the Review, enumerate once again and summarise major
contributions of significant studies to the body of knowledge under review. In this
27
enumeration and summary, maintain the focus you have established in the
introduction. Evaluate the current state of the body of knowledge reviewed,
pointing out major methodological flaws or gaps in research, inconsistencies in
theory and conclusions, and areas relevant to future study. Conclude by
establishing the relationship between the central topic of the Review and the wider
context of your discipline or profession.
You will turn in the final draft of the Review of the Literature of your
dissertation topic toward the end of the first semester. Most departments at Bilgi
require that the Review of the Literature be included in the dissertation, either as
part of the Introduction or as a separate chapter following the Introduction.
While in most disciplines in the sciences and the social sciences it is rather
routine to include the Review as a separate chapter following the Introduction, in
others, particularly in the humanities, an overview of publications in the field are
frequently integrated into the Introduction or, on occasion, placed as prefatory to
the Bibliography section at the end. The sciences more frequently employ the
Annotated Bibliography written in telescopic style. The issue will be discussed in
your Dissertation Course.
7.2.4 Main Body: Discussion and Demonstration of the Argument
The main body of any dissertation consists of the elaborate demonstration
of the argument and is divided into chapters as the topic and material require. The
number of chapters, and whether or not chapters are divided into sections, entirely
depend on your field and topic. The form and content of this segment of the
dissertation vary widely among the disciplines and will be among the main issues
discussed in your Dissertation Course.
7.2.5 Conclusion or Summary
Your topic may necessitate writing a Summary or a Conclusion to your
dissertation. If you write a Conclusion, be aware that the Conclusion of a
dissertation is not a summary of the dissertation. It may contain a re-statement of
your main argument and a summary of your work, but more fundamentally, it
presents principles, relationships, correlations and generalisations shown by the
28
results you have obtained. It iterates your interpretation of the results and their
relationship to the main problem and hypotheses, and continues with final
deductions and inferences, and the implications for further research. Dissertations
in the sciences and the social sciences generally end in a summary of conclusions, a
concise account of the main findings, and the inferences drawn from them. The
Conclusion section of a study in the humanities is composed frequently in the form
of an epilogue, one that looks forward in history from the point of the topic.
7.3 Parts of an Academic Paper or Dissertation: The Reference Material
7.3.1 Appendices
An appendix is a section at the end of a paper or dissertation incorporating
information important to the work, but indirectly related to the main subject or too
long to incorporate in the text itself. An appendix might include statistics, figures,
charts, long quotations, excursus, and so on. For every such separate item, you
must compose a separate Appendix. If the number of your appendices exceeds the
reasonable, consult with the coordinator of your Dissertation Course or your
supervisor. Appendices are designated not numerically but in upper-case letters:
Appendix A, Appendix B, etc.
7.3.2 Bibliography, Works Cited, List of References
The form, even the title, for the bibliography section is determined by your
discipline and the kind of science which your discipline is. For the explanation of
the division of styles and the style guide for your Department or Faculty, read
Section 12 below. The different styles are taken up in Sections 13 (Humanities) and
14 (Sciences and Social Sciences).
8.
Aspects of the Text
8.1 Chapter Divisions
The body of the dissertation is divided into chapters. The chapter division—the
number of chapters and their subject and content—is determined by your topic,
approach, and findings. Chapter divisions are the way to organise the presentation
of your findings so as to render them intelligible to the reader. The degree of detail
29
in the organisation of chapters and subdivisions varies among disciplines. What
does not vary is that the formatting of your text must be consistent throughout. All
headings and subheadings must be presented in the same way in each chapter, in
terms of capitalisation, placement on the page, and kind and size of type used.
Chapters are numbered consecutively in Roman or Arabic numerals: Chapter I,
Chapter II, Chapter III, etc.; or Chapter 1, Chapter 2, Chapter 3, etc. Letters may
not be used in identifying chapters and sections. Some chapters have general titles,
such as ‘Introduction’ or ‘Conclusion’, which may be followed by an explanatory
subtitle introduced by a colon (:). But other chapters must be given descriptive
titles that say something about the content of that chapter. Each chapter must begin
on a new page. If you have subheadings within a chapter, the presentation of these
must be continuous; i.e., do not begin a subdivision of a chapter on a new page.
The chapter designation (e.g., Chapter 1) appears in bold, followed by a colon
and explanatory title, centered between the text margins, 5 cm. from the top of the
page. Skip one space after the colon. The text begins three single spaces below the
heading. If your chapters are divided into sections, these sections are numbered in
accordance with the chapter number. Example:
1. Introduction
1.1. Aim of the Dissertation
1.2. Definition of Major Concepts
1.3. Methodology
For a more elaborate example, see the Table of Contents of this Guide.
Chapter and division numbers and headings must cohere with those on the
Table of Contents. Thus, as on the Table of Contents, capitalise each word in the
title of a chapter and chapter division. This rule does not apply to articles, short
prepositions, or conjunctions unless one is the first word of the title.
8.2 Illustrative Material
Illustrations include photographs, plates, drawings, figures, charts, tables, and
diagrams. These must appear as near as possible to the part of text describing or
referring to them. Illustrations longer than one-half page must be placed on a
separate sheet. Those that are one-half page or less in length may appear on the
30
same page with text. In this case, the illustration must be separated by three single
spaces from the text above or below it. Illustrations that are too large to be placed
sideways between the left- and right-hand margins should be placed so that the top
of the illustration runs parallel to the left-hand margin of the page. The caption for
an illustration so placed must also be moved to run along the left-hand margin of
the page. The standard margin requirements remain in effect. Page numbers must
appear in their standard place.
Illustrations must be numbered consecutively. This includes illustrations used
in Appendices, if applicable. There are different methods of numbering
illustrations, but the same method must be used throughout your work. You may
use a numerical sequence (1, 2, 3, 4, etc. or I, II, III, IV, etc.) or a decimal system
such as 1.1, 1.2, 1.3, 2.1, 2.2, etc.; A.1, A.2, B.1, B.2, B.3, etc. Here, the first figure
indicates the chapter number or Appendix letter, and the digit after the decimal
point is the illustration number. Thus, A.2 designates the second illustration in
Appendix A, while 2.3 or II.3 points at the third illustration of chapter 2. This
numerical designation of the illustration must be preceded by the designation of the
illustration type. For example: Table A.1, Table A.2; Fig. 1.1, Fig. 1.2. Do not use
punctuation other than those shown in these examples (e.g., no colons are used in
the designation and numbering of illustrations).
If the illustration runs longer than one page, all subsequent pages of the
illustration must include the illustration number and the notation that it is
continued. For example: Table 1 (cont.) or Table 1 (continued).
In Turkish-language text, use words like tablo, şekil, figür, resim to designate
type of illustration.
All captions and headings of illustrations must be entered in the same type and
size throughout the text. The only exception to this is when for reasons of page setup or placement, you are unable to use the type and size you have determined as
standard throughout your work. In that case, the type and size of the text used in
the illustration must be used.
Table numbers and captions are placed one space above the top line of the
illustration. Figure numbers and captions are placed one space below the last line
or bottom of the illustration.
31
Example for the placement of the number and caption of a table:
Table 1
Public Works of Art Officially Destroyed in Turkey in 1973
Artist
Type of Work
Site
Kuzgun Acar
Relief
Façade of Gima, Ankara
Mehmet Uyanık
Relief
Beşiktaş Park
Metin Haseki
Relief
Gümüşsuyu Park
Seyhun Topuz
Relief
Entry to 4. Levent
Bihrat Mavitan
Relief
Front Plaza at Harbiye Hilton
Füsun Onur
Relief
Fındıklı Park
Example of the placement of the number and caption of a figure:
Fig. 1. Leonardo Da Vimci, drawing from Notebooks, illustrating the theory of light and
Shade and the movemenrs of the human body
32
In Turkish-language text, this caption would read: “Fig. 1. Leonardo Da
Vinci’nin Defterlerinden ışık ve gölge kuramı ile insan bedeninin hareketlerini
gösteren çizimler.” Your List of Figures would contain full bibliographical information
on Leonardo Da Vinci’s Notebooks if the book has been published, or indication of the
location of the artist’s original notebooks if the work has not been published (in this case,
the work has been published: see p. 199 below). The following figure or illustration has
been produced to illustrate the author’s argument and is not the reproduction of an original
work. Thus the List of Figures or Illustrations would contain the text of the caption and
indicate the person who made the drawing if someone other than the author:
Fig. 2. Two different sections of the same projection
If photographic material enclosed is not original, either very good
photographic copy or high-resolution, high-quality photocopy must be used.
Standard photocopies of photographs are not acceptable. Mounting of photographic
material should be done with a technique that ensures durability and does not cause
the paper to which the photograph is attached to curl. Paste, glue, cement, spray
33
mounting, tape, and the like will cause paper to curl and the adhesives will
eventually destroy both paper and photograph. A method like ‘dry mounting’
should be used. This is necessary only in the final copy of the dissertation, which
will be deposited in the University Library.
If audio-visual material or stored information in the form of a computer disk
or CD accompanies the paper, project, or dissertation, it should be adequately
described at its proper place in the text, and must be submitted with final copy. If
the audio-visual or stored material is a substantial part of your dissertation, as in
some dissertations in the Departments of Film and Television, Visual
Communication Design, Management of Performing Arts, or Music, consult with
your supervisor to ensure proper preparation.
If you must use oversized material, you have several options: you can fold the
illustration and mount it on a 21 by 29.7 cm. (A4) sheet. You also have the option
of folding the illustration and inserting it in a manila envelope not larger than 16.5
by 24 cm., and mounting the envelope on a page at the proper place of the enclosed
illustration in the text. For both options, see the drawings below.
34
While the page where the envelope is mounted must be standard A4 size paper, it
should be heavier paper, of the proper weight to support the envelope and its
content(s). Each page enclosed in the envelope must be included in the pagination
of the dissertation. The page on which the envelope is mounted should carry a
single page number if the envelope holds only one page; or an inclusive page
number, depending on the number of pages the envelope holds. E.g., 16-17 (for
two pages), 16-18 (for three pages), etc. You may also opt for photo-reducing an
oversized illustration. The page number and caption of such must be the same type
and font as in the rest of the illustrations. You have yet another option. You may
place the caption of an oversized illustration on the opposite page, facing the
illustration. Since dissertations are printed on only one side of the page, your
illustration, like your other pages, will be on the right-hand side of the bound
dissertation. Thus your caption will be printed on the page that is on the left of the
bound dissertation. In this case, the five-centimetre margin for binding must be on
the right of the facing page, and not on the left. If an oversized illustration is
rotated so that its top edge runs parallel to the right- or left-hand edge of the paper
(depending on whether it is a table or a figure), the caption on the opposite page
must also be rotated.
8.3 Formulas
Mathematical and other scientific formulas, equations, and expressions must
carry numerical identification if such is required by your references to them. For
techniques of numerical identification, follow the guidelines indicated for
illustrative material in Section 8.2 above. For formulas and numerical material used
in studies in the Department of Mathematics, see Section 12 below.
8.4 Forms of Using Source Material
The forms of using source material may be summed up as quoting,
summarising, and paraphrasing. Your paper or dissertation is a piece of writing that
represents your own thinking about the topic. But since thinking takes place in a
given environment made up of others’ reflection on the same topic, others’ work is
35
taken into consideration as supporting, proving, antagonising, and disproving
aspects of your argument.
Thus writing often involves integrating information from published sources
into your own writing. In some cases, unpublished work by others too may have to
be taken into consideration. This means that you have to observe rules for
documenting sources and to be careful not to plagiarise.
8.4.1 Quotations
If you use an author’s specific word or words, you must reproduce exactly the
spelling, capitalisation, and internal punctuation and typography of the original,
place those words within quotation marks, and document the source. But try to
keep direct quotations to a minimum, using them exclusively as direct evidence for
the argument you are making when that evidence must be presented in the cited
author’s own words. Do not quote as an alternative to summarising an author’s
thesis or to paraphrasing a specific argument.
Passages to be quoted, paraphrased, or summarised are already gathered at the
reading and note-taking stage. When reading source material, try to understand the
passage as a whole, rather than pausing to write down ideas and phrases that seem
significant as you read. Read, keeping in mind the purpose for which you are
reading (your thesis statement will come in handy at this point). When you have
finished reading the passage or article and have reached a clear understanding of
the ideas contained in it, write down two kinds of things: a summary of the
information in your own words; and a paragraphshort or long as the importance
of the source requireson how you can assimilate the passage or article into your
own thoughts and argument. Only then go back and take down passages, if any,
you may wish to quote directly.
Remember you are reading in order to take notes, not to copy whole chunks of
the source. Sometimes you will find it useful to quote specific words, phrases, or
terminological items directly from the source. Be sure to enclose these in quotation
marks and record the page numbers in your notes.
36
The only exception to this mode of note-taking is when, in the humanities, you
are reading a primary source. Direct quotations from primary sources constitute the
most essential and indispensable kind of proof in the humanities. Thus, read
primary sources too with your argument (your thesis statement) in mind, and copy,
with precision, passages that acutely demonstrate your argument about that text,
author, historical culture, or theoretical point.
Since formal rules of quoting vary among the disciplines, the topic is discussed
separately for each group in Sections 13 and 14 below.
8.4.2
Summary and Paraphrase
Direct quotations are one way of incorporating others’ work into your
discussion. Other ways are summary and paraphrase. These two methods are used
when you are not absolutely obliged to quote the original and when the original is
too long or complex to quote directly. In a summary or paraphrase, you use your
own words to convey the ideas of another writer. No quotation marks are necessary
to highlight the summary or paraphrase. But you must acknowledge the source you
are summarising or paraphrasing in a note (a foot- or endnote), just as you would
with a direct quotation. The foot- or endnote mark should be placed at the end of
the sentence that concludes the summary or paraphrase. This serves to indicate to
your reader where another writer’s ideas end and your own argument resumes. You
should also convey to your reader where the paraphrase or summary begins. In the
following example, the phrase, “Studies have shown,” indicates that this writer is
now bringing in others’ work and findings. The place of the foot- or endnote
number indicates to the reader where the citation ends and your own argument
resumes:
The final step to ending homelessness is forming an organisation that will periodically
ensure that those who are provided with shelter are satisfied with their facilities and
surroundings. This function should be coupled with psychiatric care for those who are
not yet ready to rejoin society. Studies have shown that neglecting the more
personalised care of the homeless often renders efforts futile. These people tend to
return to living on the streets unless they are offered some type of support group.1 An
organisation of this type could either take the form of a government agency or work
through one of the existing social groups.
37
If your Department or Faculty requires you to use the Social Science or
Science Style System of Documentation, then most likely, in place of the note
number in the example above, you will have to indicate the source or sources
parenthetically in your text. In that case, the foot- or endnote number in the
example above would be replaced by the parenthetical indication of the source:
The final step to ending homelessness is forming an organisation that will
periodically ensure that those who are provided with shelter are satisfied with their
facilities and surroundings. This function should be coupled with psychiatric care for
those who are not yet ready to rejoin society. Studies have shown that neglecting the
more personalised care of the homeless often renders efforts futile. These people tend
to return to living on the streets unless they are offered some type of support group
(Whitman 27). An organisation of this type could either take the form of a
government agency or work through one of the existing social groups.
Further aspects of summarising and paraphrasing will emerge in comparison to
plagiarism.
8.4.3 Plagiarism
The ethics of academic research requires high sensitivity toward others’
intellectual rights. To present others’ works and ideas as one’s own, and to pass off
as original an idea or argument derived from an existing source is called
plagiarism. Plagiarism becomes particularly an issue with inexperienced writers
who may need to be very alert about the border between paraphrase and plagiarism.
You may be considered plagiarising even when you indicate your source. The
difference is best demonstrated with a concrete example. Take the following
passage from an original source:
In 1969, impatience with the rigors of the Cold War was pervasive in the West. All
leaders were under pressure to demonstrate their commitment to peace; the Soviet
Union played on these sensitivities cleverly. [From: Henry Kissinger, White House
Years (Boston: Little, Brown, 1979), p. 403.]
Now study the following instances to determine which constitute acceptable
paraphrase and summary, and which make up plagiarism:
1. Kissinger says that impatience with the Cold War in 1969 caused world leaders to
submit to pressure and demonstrate their commitment to peace while the Soviet
Union cleverly played on these sensitivities.
38
2. Henry Kissinger comments on the cleverness of the Soviet leaders who utilised in
1969 the sensitivities of world leaders who were making serious commitments for
world peace.
3. Commenting on the West’s “impatience with the rigors of the Cold War,” Henry
Kissinger argues that world leaders, “under pressure to demonstrate their
commitment to peace,” allowed the Soviet Union to play cleverly with “these
sensitivities.”
4. Kissinger indicates that Soviet leaders played with Western “sensitivities” in 1969
when the West, growing restless with Cold War policies, renewed its efforts to
establish world peace.
The only instance among the above that does not constitute plagiarism is the
fourth. The other three present different degrees of plagiarism. While the first
example is entirely unacceptable, the second and third examples too, contain
differing degrees. The second example is unacceptable; the author of the third
example could salvage the passage by substituting other terms for “play cleverly.”
Most inexperienced writers commit inadvertent plagiarism because they are not
careful at the stage of note-taking and simply copy their sources without marking
them as direct quotations.
It is not necessary to document certain kinds of factual information: birth and
death dates of prominent figures, accepted dates of public and historical events,
concepts that are so accepted that they have entered the public domain. For
example the Darwinian concept of ‘natural selection’ is one such concept so that
when you use it, you do not need to indicate the place where Darwin originally
elaborated the issue. Brief, factual information that is not common knowledge,
however, should be documented. When you are in doubt whether a concept, date,
etc. is in the public domain, to be on the safe side, cite a source.
9. Form and Appearance
9.1 Paper
21 by 29.7 cm. (A4) white paper.
9.2 Font, Size, Type
12 point Times New Roman ‘normal’ type in all text (including Abstract,
39
Dedication, Acknowledgments, Preface, Table of Contents, List of Tables, List of
Illustrations or List of Figures, List of Abbreviations and/or Symbols, reference
materials, and long and short quotations).
14 point Times New Roman ‘bold’ type for all division headings (chapter
headings; the headings for reference material). In other words, headings of
segments that are listed on the Table of Contents that come after the preliminary
pages are composed in 14-point bold. The only exceptions to this rule are headings
for the lists discussed in Section 7.1.8 above. 12 point Times New Roman ‘bold’
type is used in all division subheadings, including chapter subheadings; and in
headings for the Abstract, Acknowledgments, Preface, Table of Contents, List of
Tables, List of Illustrations or List of Figures, List of Abbreviations and/or
Symbols. Chapter subheadings are composed in 12-point regardless of whether or
not you choose to list them in the Table of Contents.
12 point Times New Roman ‘normal’ type is used in endnotes.
10 point Times New Roman ‘normal’ type is used in footnotes.
For type and font of the dissertation Title Page and Approval Page, see
sections 7.1.1 and 7.1.2 above and Appendices D and E below. Type and font of
the dissertation Title Page and Approval Page must exactly conform to the grid
supplied thereunder.
9.3 Print
The entire dissertation must be of uniform font or typeface. Acceptable printers
will produce solid, unbroken lines of type. Laser and ink-jet print are acceptable.
No manual corrections, strikeovers, correction fluid or tape, paste-ups, and other
kinds of insertions are acceptable on the final copy of the paper or the final bound
copy of the dissertation. Original print-copy must be turned in. Photocopies are not
acceptable. All print must appear on only one side of white paper.
9.4 Spacing
The text must be double-spaced or in one and a half space throughout. This
includes Abstract, Acknowledgments and, if applicable, the Preface; as well as the
Bibliography or the list of Works Cited or the list of References. Tables and
40
captions are single-spaced. In Humanities papers and dissertations, long quotations,
footnotes, and endnotes are single-spaced. In Science and Social Science papers
and dissertations, notes and long quotations follow the spacing used in the main
body of text (i.e., are double-spaced or typed in space and a half). For further
instruction in the spacing of notes, see the Section on Style relevant to your
discipline. The Table of Contents is ordinarily double-spaced. If single-spacing will
help fit a long Table of Contents on a single page, it may be single-spaced. Ask
your dissertation supervisor or the coordinator of your Dissertation Course whether
you ought to single-space the Table of Contents.
9.5 Margins
Leave 3 cm. margins from all four sides in papers.
The left margin of the dissertation must be 5 cm. wide to allow for binding; the
other three margins must be 3 cm. wide. Absolutely nothing must appear in the
margins: this means that all headings, page numbers, captions, etc., must be
contained entirely within the area circumscribed by the margins.
Right-justification must not be used anywhere in the textual parts of the paper
or dissertation.
Material that requires centering must be centred between the text margins
rather than between the edges of the paper. After the dissertation is bound, material
centred between text margins will appear to be centred on the page.
9.6 Word and Text Division
If you use hyphenation for dividing words at the end of a line, words must be
divided correctly according to the rules of the language in which the divided text is
composed. Use a standard dictionary in that language to determine word division.
A word at the end of a page may not be divided.
At least two lines of the ending of a paragraph must appear at the top of the
page. At least two lines of the beginning of a paragraph must appear at the bottom
of the page. A chapter subheading must be followed by at least two lines of text.
Today, these rules are among the default settings of computers.
41
9.7 Pagination
In an academic paper, all pages must be numbered consecutively starting with
the first page. If your paper includes a title page, the title page is not numbered.
All page numbers of the paper or dissertation must appear in the same location
on the page. There are three alternatives for the location of the page number: the
upper right-hand corner, the lower right-hand corner, and the bottom centre of the
page. Regardless of your choice of location, page numbers must be at least two
single spaces above or below the nearest line of text but within the margin
delimitations as indicated in section 9.5 above. All page numbers must be in the
same font, type, and size, viz. 12 point Times New Roman ‘normal’ type.
The following pagination rules hold for the dissertation:
For the preliminary pages, use lower-case Roman numerals (i, ii, iii, iv, etc.).
The Title Page and the Approval Page do not have numbers but count as pages i
and ii, respectively. Page numbers begin to appear with page iii on the Abstract
page. Thereafter, the page number appears on all pages.
Starting with the first page of your Introduction, use Arabic numerals (1, 2,
etc.). The page number 1 appears on the first page of the Introduction. Thereafter,
page numbers run consecutively throughout the dissertation, including the
segments devoted to Endnotes (if applicable), Appendices (if applicable), and
Bibliography or the list of Works Cited or the list of References. All pages of text
must be numbered, including pages containing chapter headings, tables,
illustrations or figures, photographs, etc.
9.8 Binding
Papers must be stapled. Paperclips are not acceptable.
İstanbul Bilgi University requires that a bound copy of the approved
dissertation be submitted to the University. This bound copy, which is turned in to
the Office of the Dean of your Faculty before it is submitted to the University
Library, must carry your dissertation supervisor’s and the Head of Department’s
signature on the Approval Page. Dissertations must be submitted with the
following colour bindings: red for the Faculty of Economics and Administrative
Sciences; navy blue for the Faculty of Science and Letters; brown for the Faculty
42
of Communication; black for the Faculty of Law. The material used in bindings is
leatherette. A bound copy of the dissertation should measure 21 by 29.7 cm. or
maximum c. 21.5 by 30.5 cm. The same text as on the Title Page must be inscribed
in gold-lettering on the front of the bound dissertation. Do not have inscribed
anything on the spine. It is your responsibility to have the pages of your text in
correct order when submitting it to the bindery. Your supervisor will not sign the
Approval Page of a dissertation whose pages are not in correct order.
9.9 Submitting Electronic Copy of the Dissertation
The bound copy of your dissertation will be catalogued and stacked in the
University Library. The İstanbul Bilgi University Library is currently developing a
system through which dissertations will also be available electronically. You are
therefore required to turn in electronic copy of your dissertation, along with bound
traditional copy. The disket copy turned in must be exactly the same as the version
from which the final print of your approved dissertation derives. Submit your text
in Word, pdf, or Excel format.
Illustrations that contain photographic or audio-visual material must be
submitted in format that is electronically accessible. (See section 8.2 above.) If
your dissertation includes such, consult the coordinator of the Dissertation Course
in your Department, who will discuss the issue with the Head Librarian, for
ensuring preparation of copy in correct format. Do remember that electronic files
saved on disket which are named using letters in capital or lower-case print that are
not in the English alphabet (ç, é, ğ, ı, ö, ş, ü, etc.) cannot be accessed in every
computer. Name your files accordingly.
The instructor of the Dissertation Course will provide a copy of the form for
posting electronic text.
10. Revising: Proofreading and Editing
Having written a first draft of your paper or dissertation, you will need to
rewrite it one or more times, each time checking that what you have written
actually reflects what you aimed to write, is balanced with coherent arguments,
displays smooth transition between the sections, and so on. Aside from reworking
43
your text with these larger structural matters in mind, you will have to proofread
and edit it. Be sure to have revised the larger, structural aspects of your text before
embarking upon proofreading and editing. Proofreading and editing imply
corrections at the sentence and word level. These should be done after you have
solved problems in the focus, organisation, and overall development of your
document.
10.1 How to Proofread
Set some time between writing and proofreading. Best is a week. If you do not
have that much time, set aside as many days, or even hours, as you can. Distance
you will thus acquire from your text will help you see mistakes more easily.
When you proofread, work from a printout, not the computer screen. (But there
are computer functions that can help you spot mistakes, which will be taken up
below.)
Read out loud. This will help you spot numerous mistakes which you may not
see when reading silently.
Use a blank sheet of paper to cover up the lines below the line you are reading.
This prevents you from skipping ahead of mistakes.
You are probably aware of the kinds of errors you tend to make. Make a list of
those and check separately for each kind of mistake. For example, read through
your text once to ensure subjects and verbs agree; then read through again to see
whether all definite and indefinite articles are in place; read again, tracing
correctness of pronouns, etc. This kind of reading for specific, mechanical errors
may also be conducted by reading the text backwards, proceeding sentence by
sentence, clause by clause, or phrase by phrase. This will prevent you from
concentrating on the direction of the argument, and keep you focused on the
particular kind of mechanical error for which you are looking.
Use the search function of the computer to find errors you are likely to have
made. For instance, search for it since you are likely to confuse its with it’s (though
in academic writing, you should not use the contraction it’s unless you must, such
as in transcribing oral discourse).
44
End with a spelling check. The computer spelling checker, however, will not
perform a thorough check. It will not catch mistakes with homonyms (samesounding words) such as they’re, their, there; its, it’s; or typing errors such as he
for the, the for she, and so on. The most effective spelling check is performed by
reading your text backwards word by word.
10.2
Editing Checklist
Aside from the kinds of mistakes mentioned above and mistakes you tend to
make, proofread your text looking for the following errors:
a. Sentence Fragments
Make sure that each word group you have punctuated with a periodi.e.,
assume is a sentencecontains a subject and a main verb, and consists of a
grammatically complete and independent thought that can stand alone as a
sentence. ‘Because’ and ‘except’ are among words which frequently cause sentence
fragments in English composition by Turkish writers:
Incorrect
Graziani lost sight of religious issues. Except to note that there was very little religion
of any kind in Venice at the time.
Correct
Graziani lost sight of religious issues except to note that there was very little religion
of any kind in Venice at the time.
Incorrect
These results were verified in a second questionnaire. Because the following
characteristics in the first had left room for doubt:
Correct
These results were verified in a second questionnaire because the following
characteristics in the first had left room for doubt:
b. Sentence Sprawl
Incorrect
The exam was scheduled for Thursday morning, but because of heavy snowfall,
students could not arrive on time, so it was rescheduled for the late afternoon.
45
There are no grammatical errors in this sentence, but the sprawling sentence is
vague.
Correct
The exam, which had been scheduled for Thursday morning, was rescheduled for late
afternoon of the same day, as students could not arrive on time owing to the heavy
snowfall.
c. Dangling and Misplaced Modifiers
Place modifiers near the word they describe. As in the example below,
sometimes the problem may be solved by more rigorous punctuation. Also make
sure the modified words actually appear in the sentence.
Incorrect
Charles Dickens wrote Great Expectations, the coming-of-age story of Philip Pirrip in
1860-1861.
Correct
In 1860-1861, Charles Dickens wrote Great Expectations, the coming-of-age story of
Philip Pirrip.
Charles Dickens wrote Great Expectations, the coming-of-age story of Philip Pirrip,
in 1860-1861.
Incorrect
When writing an academic paper, many sources are consulted.
Correct
When writing an academic paper, a scholar consults many sources.
Incorrect
Having worn the same jeans for so long, their colour has faded.
Correct
Having worn the same jeans for so long, John realised their colour had faded.
d. Unclear Pronoun Reference
All pronouns must clearly refer to definite referents (nouns). To prevent
confusion, use it, they, this, that, these, those, which, who, etc. carefully.
Incorrect
46
Because the minister is less interested in public health than in industrial growth, he
neglects it.
Correct
Because of his interest in industrial growth, the minister neglects public health issues.
e. Incorrect Pronoun Case
Determine whether the pronoun is being used as a subject, or an object, or a
possessive, and select the pronoun form to match.
Incorrect
Their different interests inevitably led to conflict between he and the administration.
Correct
Their different interests inevitably led to conflict between him and the administration.
Incorrect
He likes the country as much as them.
Correct
He likes the country as much as they.
f. Strings of Nouns
Avoid strings of nouns. This is a grammatical and stylistic error Turkish
speakers tend to commit rather frequently when writing English. Unlike Turkish,
strings of nouns cause confusion in English.
Incorrect
Correct
Agriculture Ministry
Ministry of Agriculture
employee relations improvement
programme
programme to improve relations among
employees
student-professor relationship factors
factors in the relationship between students
and professors
g. Transitions
Transitional words and phrases create links between your ideas and help your
reader understand the logic of your argument. Use them!
47
Below are lists of transitional words and phrases grouped according to
meaning. Before you use a particular transitional word or phrase, look up its
meaning in the dictionary and ensure you understand its particular connotation or
nuance.
Addition
further
moreover
in the second place
furthermore
too, also, as well
again
also
and, or, nor
next
in addition
even more
finally
besides
last, lastly
Contrast
yet
on the contrary
but
and yet
in contrast
however
nevertheless
notwithstanding
though
nonetheless
on the other hand
otherwise
after all
at the same time
Comparison
in the same way
by the same token
similarly
in like manner
likewise
in similar fashion
to illustrate
for instance
as an illustration
to demonstrate
e.g., (for example)
for example
that is to say
i.e., (that is)
to rephrase it
in other words
to clarify
to put it another way
undoubtedly
doubtedly
Exemplification
specifically
Clarification
to explain
Intensification
indeed
48
to repeat
in fact
certainly
by all means
surely
without doubt
of course
yes, no
Qualification
almost
perhaps
never
nearly
maybe
always
probably
although
frequently
so that
for this purpose
because
on account of
since
for that reason
as
Purpose
in order that
to that end, to this end
Cause
Effect
therefore
consequently
accordingly
thus
hence
as a result
granted
of course, it is true
to summarise
in short
in brief
in sum
in summary
to sum up
to conclude
finally
while
immediately
never
after
later, earlier
always
Concession
to be sure
Summary
Conclusion
in conclusion
Time
49
when
soon
whenever
meanwhile
sometimes
in the mean time
during
afterwards
now, until now
next
following
once
then
at length
simultaneously
so far
this time
subsequently
here
beyond
adjacent to
there
wherever
neighbouring on
nearby
opposite to
above, below
Place
10.3
Hyphens
Hyphens are a mark of punctuation. They are used to indicate sudden reversals
in thought or tone within a sentence or to emphasise some sentence elements. They
differ from parentheses in that hyphens create emphasis. They make a sharper
break in the continuity of the sentence than commas do, and parentheses create a
still sharper one. Limit the number of hyphens in a sentence to two paired hyphens
or one unpaired hyphen.
With the increased sophistication of software, the double hyphen (--), which
was used in the ‘typewrite era’, has disappeared. In your academic paper or
dissertation, use the long hyphen your software will produce when you type two
short dashes, or insert a long hyphen from the ‘Symbols’ menu. Do not leave blank
spaces before or after a hyphen:
Her enthusiasticor shall we say dithyrambiceloquence moved the reluctant crowd
to action.
Widowhood enablesor, compelswomen to join the public sphere.
A single hyphen may also be used instead of a colon to introduce an
elaboration of what was said in the first part of the sentence or to introduce a list:
Gold, green, ultramarine blue—these are colours that carry theological meaning in late
medieval and early Renaissance painting.
Reserve the short hyphen (or, dash) that appears on your computer keyboard for
use in hyphenated words such as ‘one-sided’ or ‘hand-to-mouth’.
50
11. Documentation Styles
Academic writing draws on previous research and publications. When you
draw on the work of others, you must credit those sources. Failure to document
your sources constitutes plagiarism.
Documentation styles were established to provide scholars with systematic
ways to credit the sources used. Their function, however, is not only to credit
sources, but also to communicate information that will help the reader locate those
sources. Thus they provide the reader with bibliographical information and render
research verifiable.
Different academic disciplines use different styles. For your papers, check with
your instructor. The styles used, in dissertations, by the different departments and
faculties at Bilgi are indicated below. It is important to understand fully the
documentation style to be used in your paper or dissertation, and to apply it
consistently.
You must document information and ideas that originate in someone else’s
work. This includes direct quotations; paraphrases and summaries; brief references;
information, ideas, and concepts that are not common knowledge. How do you tell
what constitutes ‘common knowledge’ in your discipline? Find out what the
standard reference works in your discipline are; any information contained therein
is considered ‘common knowledge’ in your field. Another general rule for what to
document is: any borrowed material that may seem to be your own if not credited
to its source should be documented. When in doubt, pick the safe option and
indicate a source. This ethical principle is the founding principle of academic,
scientific inquiry. It is the bedrock that makes possible intellectual creativity and
the free exchange of ideas.
Documentation, and the application of a style, will be made easy if you
carefully record the necessary information while you conduct research. It may be a
good idea to familiarise yourself with the applicable documentation style before
you embark upon research and note-taking. Always write down the complete
bibliographic information available for each source you consult. Do not leave it for
‘later’. ‘Later’, you may not be able to find that source again. Always make a note
51
of the page numbers of quotations you write down. Double check the quotation for
accuracy before you return the source to the library. (See above, Section 6.7.2 for
what constitutes complete bibliographic information.)
Include documentation already in the first draft of your paper or dissertation
chapter. This includes direct quotations as well as references that are less direct,
such as paraphrases, summaries, etc.
The choice of documentation style is determined by the standard for the
discipline in which you are studying, the requirements of the particular course, and
finally by your individual preference. When and if you submit articles or book
manuscripts for publication, you will find that every journal and publishing house
has a preferred style. Your instructor will most likely indicate a preference on the
course syllabus or in the assignment, or simply mention it in class. If no
documentation style is indicated for a course in which you must write a paper, ask
whether the instructor has a preference. Only if no preference is indicated are you
free to choose a style.
Remember that the styles in different disciplines are the result of work and
experience in those disciplines over decades and, in some cases, centuries. Their
differences have to do with the differences in the approach to ‘documents’ in the
disciplines, and what a discipline considers a ‘document’. Documentation Styles
are not arbitrary techniques, but meticulously detailed systems. Be consistent in
your application of them, and never forget that your application of that style in your
papers and dissertation is perhaps your first major step in professional ethics.
12. Documentation Styles Used at İstanbul Bilgi University
The İstanbul Bilgi University Style for the Humanities is used in the
following faculties and departments:
•
•
•
The Faculty of Law
The Faculty of Communication
The Departments of Comparative Literature, History, and Music in the
Faculty of Science and Letters
Nota bene for students in the Faculty of Law: while law dissertations in
52
general employ the Humanities Style, regarding the mode of citing legal sources,
consult with your dissertation supervisor. Supervisors in the Faculty of Law have
varying preferences concerning different kinds of legal material. For examples of
some of these, see the appendices in the back of this Guide.
The İstanbul Bilgi University Style for the Sciences and the Social Sciences
is used in the following faculties and departments:
•
•
The Faculty of Economics and Administrative Sciences
The Departments of Computer Science, Mathematics, Psychology and
Sociology in the Faculty of Science and Letters
Nota bene for students in the Department of Mathematics: the Department
of Mathematics requires dissertation students to use the software Scientific
Workplace, which formats scientific text. CDs of this software are available in the
Department.
13. İstanbul Bilgi University Style for the Humanities
This style is used by the Faculty of Law, the Faculty of Communication, and
the Departments of Comparative Literature, History, and Music in the Faculty of
Science and Letters.
Below, you will find discussion of how to handle quotations in your writing,
how to prepare your bibliography, and how to document your use of sources (i.e.,
the preparation of foot- and endnotes).
13.1 Quotations
13.1.1 Short and Long Quotations
Quotations are two kinds: short and long. A short prose quotation is one that is
four lines or shorter when typed. A prose quotation that is five lines or longer is
considered a long quotation. A short verse quotation is less than four lines long. A
long verse quotation is four lines or longer.
Short quotations are incorporated into the text and enclosed in double
quotation marks. If the short quotation is of verse, separate one line of verse from
another with a slash mark. Do not skip spaces before and after the slash mark:
53
Shakespeare had cast the same idea in the form of a rhetorical question in the opening
of Sonnet 18: “Shall I compare thee to a summer’s day?/Thou art more lovely and
more temperate:/Rough winds do shake the darling buds of May.”
“Akşam, yine akşam, yine akşam,/Göllerde bu dem bir kamış olsam.”
Long prose or verse quotations must be set off from the text by indentation.
Indent a long quotation in its entirety, by ten spaces from the left margin. Expand
the right-hand margin of the indented quotation only slightly. Do not justify the
right-hand margin of the indented quotation. When a quotation is indented,
quotation marks are not used. Single-space indented quotations. The sentence
introducing a long quotation nearly always ends with a colon (:). For example:
The revised ending to Charles Dickens’ Great Expectations indicates a future happier
than the one implied by the original conclusion:
I took her hand in mine, and we went out of the ruined place; and,
as the morning mists had risen long ago when I first left the forge, so,
the evening mists were rising now, and in all the broad expanse of
tranquil light they showed to me, I saw no shadow of another parting
from her.
The quotation above starts with a paragraph indentation only because such
exists in the original text. If the original does not contain a paragraph indentation at
the beginning of the line, do not introduce a paragraph indentation at the beginning
of the long quotation. The following quoted passage starts a new paragraph in the
fifth line:
And I took him down to the churchyard, and set him on a certain
tombstone there, and he showed me from that elevation which stone
was sacred to the memory of Philip Pirrip, late of this Parish, and Also
Georgiana, Wife of the Above.
‘Biddy,’ said I, when I talked with her after dinner, as her little girl
lay sleeping in her lap, ‘you must give Pip to me, one of these days; or
lend him, at all events.’
All quotations from drama are treated like long prose quotations. Indent
dialogue between characters in a play as you would a long prose quotation, and
single-space it. Place the speaker’s name in capital letters before the speech quoted
and place a colon after the name:
POLONIUS: What is the matter my lord?
HAMLET:
Between who?
54
(II.ii.194-95)
NEK:
Rİ:
Ben en son, beş yıl önce yargılanmıştım.
Benim yargılanmama daha üç yıl var.
13.1.2 Punctuating Quotations
The period at the end of a short quotation goes inside the double quotation
mark:
“The new electric galaxy of events has already moved deeply into the Gutenberg
galaxy.”
According to Jonathan Clarke, “Professional diplomats often say that trying to think
diplomatically about foreign policy is a waste of time.”
But you may alter the original closing punctuation of a quotation in order to
incorporate it into a sentence of your own:
“The new electric galaxy of events has already moved deeply into the Gutenberg
galaxy,” wrote Marshall McLuhan in 1962.
Commas and periods go inside the closing quotation marks; the other
punctuation markssemicolons, colons, exclamation points and question
marksgo outside:
In 1962, McLuhan wrote that the “new electric galaxy of events” had “already moved
deeply into the Gutenberg galaxy”; however, only forty years later, in 2002, electronic
media seem to have reached the far side of that galaxy. Can we still claim that we
have only “moved deeply into the Gutenberg galaxy”?
If the question mark, exclamation point, semicolon or colon is in the original,
it remains inside the closing quotation marks:
“Between who?” asks Hamlet.
You may have to omit material from a quoted passage. In that case use ellipsis
points in square brackets to indicate the omission. If you do not use square
brackets, you are indicating that the ellipses are in the original. Leave one space
each before and after the brackets:
“The new electric galaxy […] has already moved […] into the Gutenberg galaxy.”
55
You omit material from the original passage for brevity and in order to include
only those portions of the original sentences that are related to your point of
analysis.
When you omit an entire sentence, the ellipsis points in brackets are placed
after the period concluding the preceding sentence. Leave one space each before
and after the brackets:
“The new electric galaxy of events has already moved deeply into the Gutenberg
galaxy. [...] Our most ordinary and conventional attitudes seem suddenly twisted into
gargoyles and grotesques.”
When you omit the ending of a sentence, the period concluding that sentence
goes after the ellipsis points in brackets. There is no space after the bracket:
“Our most ordinary and conventional attitudes seem suddenly twisted [...].”
To add your own clarification, comment, or correction within quotations, use
square brackets. The material enclosed in square brackets in the following sentence
was added to clarify the grammatical subject of the quotation:
“He [Hamlet] changes after seeing Fortinbras and his army.”
Since a quotation must reproduce the original exactly, you must reproduce
erroneous text exactly as well. To indicate the presence of error in the text, place
the word sic in italics in square brackets after the word or words that contain the
error. Leave one space each before and after the brackets. Since in the following,
the word ‘ethicists’ has been mistyped, quoting this sentence requires the use of sic,
which means ‘thus’, ‘so’, ‘in this manner’ in Latin:
Although some medical ethicsts [sic] claim that cloning will lead to designer
creatures, others note that the advantages for medical research outweigh ethical
consideration.
For a quotation within a quotation, use single quotation marks:
In 1993, William McWhirter had reported in Time that GM’s newly appointed
president Smith was optimistic, though cautious, about the outcome of the crisis in the
industry: the “industry is now strong enough to add 12 %$ 20 billionto the
nation’s gross domestic product in the last quarter of this year. ‘It’s been a long time,
but you always thought of the U.S. auto industry as the engine of economic recoveries
in the 1950s and ‘60s’, says Smith.” McWhirter’s interview with Smith ...
56
The place of punctuation changes with single quotation marks in quotations
within quotations, and follows the rule for all single quotation marks as described
in Section 13.1.6 below. Thus while punctuation that is part of the quoted text goes
inside the single quotation mark, punctuation you add to incorporate the quotation
in your text go outside the single quotation mark:
The author emphatically points at Hamlet’s “feigned naïveté”: “We find another
ironic instance of the hero’s feigned naïveté in his reply to Polonius: ‘the satirical
rogue says that old men have grey beards’, continues Hamlet after his rhetorical
question.” We can multiply the examples.
13.1.3 Integrating Quotations into Text
The purpose of a quotation is to support the argument your paper or
dissertation is developing. You select, present, and discuss material from another
source specifically to prove your pointto make your case in much the same way
a lawyer brings evidence before a judge. Thus the quoted materialyour
evidencemust be explicitly linked to the point for which you are quoting it. This
implies certain principles in presenting quotations.
Always introduce a quotation. Always signal to your reader that a quotation is
coming. Frequently, this signal is a colon. Always introduce a quotation either by
indicating what the quoted passage is to demonstrate or by naming its source, or
both:
Cassio represents not only a political but also a personal threat to Iago: “He hath a
daily beauty in his life/That makes me ugly [...]” (Othello V.i.19-20).
In Shakespeare’s Othello, Cassio represents not only a political but also a personal
threat to Iago: “He hath a daily beauty in his life/That makes me ugly [...]” (V.i.1920).
In introducing the quotation, you may name the title of the source and the
author in the signal phrase:
In her book Contemporary Feminist Thought, Eisenstein warns against a “false
universalism that addresses itself to all women.”
Or you may wish to name only the author:
“The new electric galaxy of events has already moved deeply into the Gutenberg
galaxy,” wrote Marshall McLuhan in 1962.
57
In a discussion of Enlightenment political philosophy, Eisenstein asserts that while
“liberal theory contested the divine right of monarchs and aristocrats to political rule,”
women questioned the “divine” right of men to deny suffrage to half of the
population.
There are numerous other ways of integrating a quotation into your text. Keep
in mind that quotations become confusingand unacceptableif they seem to
‘drop from the sky’.
Never use two quotations in a row, without inserting material of your own
(your own explanatory sentences) in between the quotations.
When quoting, you may have to alter grammatical forms such as the verb tense
or the person of a pronoun so that the quotation conforms grammatically to your
own prose. Indicate these alterations by placing square brackets around the
changed form. In the first example below, the author is quoting McLuhan, who has
written the following sentence: “The new electric galaxy of events has already moved
deeply into the Gutenberg galaxy.” The author needs to integrate McLuhan’s sentence into
his or her own. This requires that the present-tense verb in McLuhan’s original be changed
so as to conform with our author’s past-tense verb. Thus ‘had’ is placed in brackets:
In 1962, McLuhan wrote that the “new electric galaxy of events [had] already moved
deeply into the Gutenberg galaxy.”
In Shakespeare’s play, King Lear says to Cordelia: “mend you speech a little.”
When embedding Lear’s statement in your own sentence, you would have to
change the possessive adjective. Thus ‘her’, which replaces ‘your’, is placed in
brackets:
Lear advises Cordelia to “mend [her] speech a little.”
13.1.4 Quoting Foreign-Language Text and Indicating Translations
When you use foreign-language material, first quote text in original language,
then type the translation.
If the foreign-language quotation is a short quotation, place it in double
quotation marks within your text. The translation may be given in parentheses
following the original or without parentheses, after a colon following the quotation
of the original. The colon is placed outside the quotation marks. If the translation
you are using is from a published work, place the translation too, inside double
58
quotation marks and supply publication information in a note. If you are using your
own translation, place it within single quotation marks.
The following examples provide the model for including the translation with
and without parentheses. The first set uses a translation from an existing
publication.
[...] Sydney Carton’un Shrewsbury’ye birlikte gittiği Stryver’in A Tale of Two Cities
II.5’de acımasızca yüzüne vurduğu gibi, Carton’un gelgitleri umutları boşa çıkarmıştı:
“the old seesaw Sydney up one minute and down the next; now in spirits and now in
despondency!”1 (“Tahterevalli gibi Sydney...bir bakmışsın yukarıda, bir bakmışsın
aşağıda. Bir an neşe içinde; bir an perişan... .”2)
[...] Sydney Carton’un Shrewsbury’ye birlikte gittiği Stryver’in A Tale of Two Cities
II.5’de acımasızca yüzüne vurduğu gibi, Carton’un gelgitleri umutları boşa çıkarmıştı:
“the old seesaw Sydney up one minute and down the next; now in spirits and now in
despondency!”:1 “Tahterevalli gibi Sydney...bir bakmışsın yukarıda, bir bakmışsın
aşağıda. Bir an neşe içinde; bir an perişan... .”2
1
Charles Dickens, A Tale of Two Cities, yay. haz. H. G. Buehler ve Lawrence Mason;
H. Y. Moffet tarafından gözden geçirilmiş baskı (yer yok: Macmillan, 1906; 1947), s. 145.
2
Charles Dickens, İki Şehrin Hikayesi, çev. Füsun Elioğlu (İstanbul: Oda Yayınları,
2000), s. 78.
In a case like the above, you may also combine the two notes by placing the
note number at the end of the translation. You may combine notes in both versions,
with and without parentheses. The example below uses no parentheses:
[...] Sydney Carton’un Shrewsbury’ye birlikte gittiği Stryver’in A Tale of Two Cities
II.5’de acımasızca yüzüne vurduğu gibi, Carton’un gelgitleri umutları boşa çıkarmıştı:
“the old seesaw Sydney up one minute and down the next; now in spirits and now in
despondency!”: “Tahterevalli gibi Sydney...bir bakmışsın yukarıda, bir bakmışsın
aşağıda. Bir an neşe içinde; bir an perişan... .”1
1
Charles Dickens, A Tale of Two Cities, yay. haz. H. G. Buehler ve Lawrence Mason;
H. Y. Moffet tarafından gözden geçirilmiş baskı (yer yok: Macmillan, 1906; 1947), s. 145;
İki Şehrin Hikayesi, çev. Füsun Elioğlu (İstanbul: Oda Yayınları, 2000), s. 78.
When an author uses his or her own translation, the translated text is placed in
single quotation marks:
Among the commentators, Franciscus Robortellus groups poetry with rhetoric and
various parts of logic and takes Poetics 1447a18ff. to refer to painting, sculpture and
59
acting: “sequitur similitudo quaedam ducta a pictura, sculptura et histrionica” (‘there
is a similarity connecting painting, sculpture and acting’). 1
1
In librium Aristotelis de arte poetica explicationes (Florence, 1548), pp. 10-11.
In the case of very brief passages quoted, an author may choose to be less
formal and not use quotation marks when supplying his or her own free translation.
In the following example, “those who make helmets and swords out of chalices” is
in fact the English paraphrase of the Italian original quoted:
Guasti held that Michalengelo’s outcry against those who make helmets and swords
out of chalices (“Qua si fa elmi di calici Ephesus spade”) dates from the period of
Julius’ expansionist ambitions.
Translations of long quotations are indented and single-spaced and in every
other way follow the form of the long quotation. The original-language text
precedes the translation; the translation is placed in parentheses.
The first example below is from an English-language text that quotes a long
passage from a Turkish work. The translation has been done by the author:
Spanish picaros begin their life in very poor conditions and at the end they are as poor
as at the beginning. Süleyman’s beginning is very much like this. We even see him as
a beggar in one episode:
Akşamları yiyeceği bir lokma ekmeği, hergün, gündüzden dilenmeye
mecbur olduğu halde, o gün, bütün vaktini Mısır kumandanının
karargahı etrafında geçirdiğinden dilenmeye dahi vakit bulamamıştı.
Bunun için, o akşam caminin son cemaat yerinde aç taksir yatmaya
mecbur oldu.1
(‘Even though every day he has to beg for the piece of bread he is to eat
at noon that day, he spent all his time in the vicinity of the Egyptian
commander’s headquarters and had not had the time to beg. Because of
this, that night he was compelled to go to bed at the mosque, hungry.’)
1
Ahmet Mithat, Musullu Süleyman, ed. Behçet Necatigil (Istanbul: Milliyet Yayınları,
1971), p. 128.
The form for quoting translations of poetry follow the same rules as for quoting
poetry as well as for supplying translations of long passages.
60
The following example from Turkish-language text offers instances of
quoted poetry both long and short. The translations have been made by the author:
Euporion’un ağzından Yunanlılar ve Yunanistan adına Byron konuşur:
Ich will nicht länger
Am Boden stocken
Laβt meine Hände.
(‘Daha fazla
Yerde kalmak istemiyorum
Bırakın ellerimi!’)
Helena ve Faust onu uyarır: “Bändige! Bändige!” (‘Dur, kendini denetle!’).
In the example below, the translation of the poetry derives from a published
source. But, as is frequently the case with difficult poetic language, the translation
is a prose translation. The English prose version below, of the three lines of poetry,
does not meet the length requirement for long prose quotations. Nevertheless, it is
typed like a long quotation:
In no.18, the emphasis is on his silence, his desire to avoid an audience:
Tacito vo, ché le parole morte
Farian pianger la gente; et i’desio
Che le lagrime mie si spargan sole.
(“I go silent; for my dead words would make people weep, and I desire
my tears to be shed in solitude.”)
Again the sources may be given in a single note with a number placed after the
translation, outside the closing parenthesis, or the sources for the original and for
the translation may be given in two separate notes.
13.1.5 Quoting Literary Texts and Philosophical Dialogues
When citing literary works, for non-narrative poetry, it is customary to
attribute quotations to ‘the speaker’ (şiiri konuşan) or ‘the lyric voice’ (lirik ses);
for a story (in verse or prose) with a narrator, to ‘the narrator’. For narrative poetry,
‘persona’ (persona) may be used. For plays, novels, and other works with
characters, identify characters by name when you quote their speech.
61
Identify interlocutors (speakers) by name when you quote from philosophical
dialogues such as Plato’s. Do not attribute the speech of all interlocutors to the
author of the dialogue.
When you quote sacred texts and Greek and Roman classics, there is a special
way of referring to pagination. In these cases, consult with your instructor.
13.1.6 Double and Single Quotation Marks
In text, use double quotation marks for material quoted from an outside
source only. For all other purposes, use single quotation marks. The following are
among those purposes. Notice that the punctuation mark that follows a single
quotation mark goes outside the quotation mark:
a. Use single quotation marks around words used in a special sense, in an
ironic sense or purposefully misused:
The book describes a humanoid’s ‘emotions’.
They were betrayed by a ‘friend’.
But with phrases like ‘so-called’ or ‘as it were’, there is no need for
quotation marks:
The book describes a humanoid’s so-called emotions.
The book describes a humanoid’s emotions, as it were.
b. Use single quotation marks to highlight a term or to emphasise that it
stands apart in some sense from the rest of the words in the sentence:
Our concept of ‘aesthetics’ is a relatively new notion in the history of culture.
c. Use single quotation marks for the translation of a foreign word or
phrase:
Aisthesis means ‘sense perception’ in Greek and has little relation to our concept of
‘aesthetics’ today.
Double quotation marks are reserved strictly for quotations.
62
13.2 Bibliography
The Works Cited or Bibliography section that follows upon the Conclusion or
Appendices, if any, contains an accurate listing, in strict alphabetical order, of
sources used in your study. The designations ‘Works Cited’ and ‘Bibliography’ are
not interchangeable. Use ‘Works Cited’ if your list of sources includes only
publications which you cite in the text. The heading ‘Bibliography’ on the other
hand, indicates that your list includes work which you may not necessarily have
quoted or otherwise cited in the text but which you find indispensable to the
thorough comprehension and background of your topic. Note that, starting with the
academic year 2001-2002, undergraduate dissertations may include a list of Works
Cited only. A full Bibliography is neither required nor permitted.
In the Humanitiesdisciplines that entail historical investigation of their
subject mattera distinction may be made between the Primary Works (Asal
Yapıtlar) and the Secondary Works (İkincil Yapıtlar) in the bibliography. Primary
Works are those texts and documents which the paper or dissertation analyses and
interprets, while Secondary works consist of analyses and interpretations of, and
commentaries on, those texts and documents. For example, if you are writing a
dissertation that analyses the films of Peter Greenaway, films and texts by
Greenaway, as well as interviews with him, constitute primary material whereas
sources about Greenaway, film history, film theory, etc. constitute secondary
material. If your dissertation is concerned with images of youth in televised
advertisements, the advertisements constitute primary material whereas any
interpretive, historical, theoretical material you use make up your bibliography of
secondary works. In literature and history, the literary texts and historical
documents you analyse are primary material, commentary on them constitute
secondary material. Say, your paper or dissertation is concerned with work or
works by an eighteenth-century author. That author’s works constitute primary
material for the dissertation, but so do any sources (periodical articles, critical
essays, histories, etc.) you use that have been produced by the contemporaries of
your author.
Basic rules for preparation of bibliography in the humanities are the following:
63
1. Each entry is listed alphabetically by the author’s last name. If there is no
author, the first word of the title is used without A, An, The if you are writing in
English. If you are writing in Turkish, no such exception is made.
2. Author’s names are inverted (last name first): if a work has more than one
author, invert only the first author’s name, follow it with a comma, then
continue listing the rest of the authors without inverting their names.
3. If you have cited more than one work by a particular author, order the works
alphabetically by title, and use three hyphens in place of the author’s name for
every entry after the first. When an author appears both as the single author of
a work and as the first author of a group, list single author entries first.
4. The first line of each entry in your bibliography should be flush left.
Subsequent lines should be indented one centimetre. This is known as a
‘hanging indent’.
5. All references should be spaced in conformity with the spacing of the rest of
your paper or dissertation (see Section 9.4 above). However, in the case of an
exceedingly long bibliographical list, you may single space entries more than
one line long.
6. Capitalise each word in the titles of articles, books, etc. This rule does not
apply to articles, short prepositions, or conjunctions unless one is the first word
of the title or subtitle.
7. Underline or italicise title of books, journals, magazines, newspapers, films,
and works of visual art.
8. Use quotation marks around the titles of articles in journals, magazines, and
newspapers. Also use quotation marks around the titles of book chapters, short
stories, poems, and songs.
9. When needed, list page numbers efficiently: if you refer to a journal article that
appears on pages 189 through 197, list the page numbers as 189-97.
13.2.1 The Form of an Entry for a Book
The bibliographical entry for a book has three main divisions entered in the
order of: author, title, and publication information. Punctuation, typography, and
spacing are exactly as in the following:
64
Author(s). Title of the Book. Place of Publication: Publisher, Year of Publication.
Unlike the form of an entry in a foot- or endnote, in the bibliography the author’s
surname is given first, followed by a comma and first name(s), followed by a
period:
Abrams, Meyer H.
Kafka, Franz.
Karaosmanoğlu, Yakup Kadri.
13.2.1.1 Book with a Single Author:
King, John N. Tudor Royal Iconography: Literature and Art in an Age of Crisis.
Princeton, NJ: Princeton University Press, 1989.
McLuhan, Marshall. Understanding Media: The Extensions of Man. New York: Signet,
1964.
Tanpınar, Ahmet Hamdi. On Dokuzuncu Asır Türk Edebiyatı Tarihi. Istanbul:
Çağlayan Kitabevi, 1949.
Uman, Nuri. Enflasyon Muhasebesi. Istanbul: Boğaziçi Üniversitesi Yayınları, 1979.
Underline or italicise the title of the book. Whichever method you use, be
consistent. Leave a space after every period, comma, and colon or other
punctuation mark. The Turkish sources given above are assumed to be used in an
English-language text. If you are using these books in a Turkish-language text, you
would have to spell the place of publication (in this case ‘Istanbul’) in Turkish, as
‘İstanbul’. Similarly, the place of publication for a book printed in London, would
be indicated as ‘London’ in an English-language text, but as ‘Londra’ in a Turkishlanguage text. For example, Botting’s work would be entered in the bibliography of
a Turkish-language text as follows:
Botting, Fred. Gothic. Londra ve New York: Routledge, 1997.
It is customary to indicate the state (for the United States and Canada) or
country as part of the information on the place of publication if the place of
publication is a small town or if there are two places by the same name (such as
Cambridge):
Beiser, Frederick C. Enlightenment, Revolution, and Romanticism: The Genesis of Modern
German Political Thought, 1790-1800. Cambridge, Mass.: Harvard University
Press, 1992.
65
Dickens, Charles. Great Expectations. Harmondsworth, U.K.: Penguin Books, 1965.
Hyde, Alan. Bodies of Law. Princeton, NJ: Princeton University Press, 1997.
If two or more locations are indicated by a publisher, include all locations:
Dahlgren, Peter. Television and the Public Sphere: Citizenship, Democracy, and the
Media. London and Thousand Oaks, Calif.: Sage Publications, 1997.
The name of the publisher is always spelled as it is in the original language.
For example, do not alter Turkish, French, or German diacritical marks [noktalama
işaretleri] to fit the English alphabet:
İstanbul Bilgi Üniversitesi Yayınları
Hermès
Buchhändler-Vereinigung
The name of an author is always spelled as it is in the original language. For
instance, even though in the bibliography of an English-language text you would
write “Istanbul”i.e., with an ‘undotted’ capital ias in the third example below,
you would not alter the typography of the Turkish author’s name. The same rule
holds for letters in the title. The following are models for entries in the
bibliography of an English-language text:
Malraux, André. Le Musée imaginaire. Paris: Gallimard, 1965.
Molnár, Géza von. Romantic Vision, Ethical Context: Novalis and Artistic Autonomy.
Minneapolis: University of Minnesota Press, 1987.
Ortaylı, İlber. İmparatorluğun En Uzun Yılı. Istanbul: Hil, 1995.
In Turkish-language text, the above entries would look as in the following:
Malraux, André. Le Musée imaginaire. Paris: Gallimard, 1965.
Molnár, Géza von. Romantic Vision, Ethical Context: Novalis and Artistic Autonomy.
Minneapolis: University of Minnesota Press, 1987.
Ortaylı, İlber. İmparatorluğun En Uzun Yılı. İstanbul: Hil, 1995.
13.2.1.2 Two or More Books by the Same Author
In English-language text:
Palmer, William J. Dickens and New Historicism. New York: St. Martin Press, 1993.
66
---. The Films of the Eighties: A Social History. Carbondale: Southern Illinois University
Press, 1993.
Belge, Murat. Edebiyat Üzerine Yazılar. Istanbul: Yapı Kredi Yayınları, 1994.
---. 12 Yıl Sonra 12 Eylül. Istanbul: Birikim Yayınları, 1993.
Duben, Alan. İnsan Hakları ve Demokratikleşme: Yerel Yönetimlerin ve Gönüllü
Kuruluşların Rolleri. Istanbul: WALD, 1988.
---, and Cem Behar. Istanbul Households: Marriage, Family, and Fertility, 1880-1940.
Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1991.
In Turkish-language text:
Palmer, William J. Dickens and New Historicism. New York: St. Martin Press, 1993.
---. The Films of the Eighties: A Social History. Carbondale: Southern Illinois University
Press, 1993.
Belge, Murat. Edebiyat Üzerine Yazılar. İstanbul: Yapı Kredi Yayınları, 1994.
---. 12 Yıl Sonra 12 Eylül. İstanbul: Birikim Yayınları, 1993.
Duben, Alan. İnsan Hakları ve Demokratikleşme: Yerel Yönetimlerin ve Gönüllü
Kuruluşların Rolleri. İstanbul: WALD, 1988.
---, ve Cem Behar. Istanbul Households: Marriage, Family, and Fertility, 1880-1940.
Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1991.
13.2.1.3 Book by More Than One Author
The authors’ names for a book with two or three authors are entered in the
order the names appear on the cover of the book. Only the name of the first author
is inverted. Individual authors’ names are separated by commas, and there is an
‘and’‘ve’ in Turkish-language textbefore the name of the last author. The
‘and’ or ‘ve’ is preceded by a comma.
In English-language text:
Manavgat, Çağlar, and Rüya Kadrizade Eser. Aleni Pay Alım Teklifi. Istanbul: Sermaye
Piyasası Kurulu, 1997.
67
Ostrander, Sheila, and Lynn Schroeder. Superlearning. New York: Delacorte, 1979.
Tezcan, Sabahat, Caral E. Carpenter Yaman, and Nusret H. Fişek. Abortion in Turkey.
Ankara: Hacettepe Üniversitesi Yayınları, 1980.
In Turkish-language text:
Manavgat, Çağlar, ve Rüya Kadrizade Eser. Aleni Pay Alım Teklifi. İstanbul: Sermaye
Piyasası Kurulu, 1997.
Ostrander, Sheila, ve Lynn Schroeder. Superlearning. New York: Delacorte, 1979.
Tezcan, Sabahat, Caral E. Carpenter Yaman, ve Nusret H. Fişek. Abortion in Turkey.
Ankara: Hacettepe Üniversitesi Yayınları, 1980.
13.2.1.4 Book by More Than Three Authors
If there are more than three authors, you must list only the first author followed
by the phrase et al. (Latin for ‘and others’) in English- and Turkish-language texts,
or vd. (‘ve diğerleri’) in Turkish-language texts. Choose either one for Turkishlanguage texts but whichever you choose, be consistent.
In English-language text:
Guerin, Wilfred L., et al. A Handbook of Critical Approaches to Literature. New York:
Harper, 1966.
Özmen, Tahsin, et al. Dünya Borsalarında Gözlemlenen Anomaliler. Istanbul: Sermaye
Piyasası Kurulu, 1997.
In Turkish-language text:
Guerin, Wilfred L., vd. A Handbook of Critical Approaches to Literature. New York:
Harper, 1966.
Özmen, Tahsin, vd. Dünya Borsalarında Gözlemlenen Anomaliler. İstanbul: Sermaye
Piyasası Kurulu, 1997.
13.2.1.5 Book with a Corporate (Group) Author:
The full name of the corporation or group is entered without inversions, as it is
printed in the source publication.
In English-language text:
Milli Folklor Araştırma Komitesi. Türk Folkloru. Ankara: Kültür Bakanlığı, 1983.
68
Task Force on Education for Economic Growth. Action for Excellence. Washington, D.C.:
Education Commission of the United States, 1983.
In Turkish-language text:
Milli Folklor Araştırma Komitesi. Türk Folkloru. Ankara: Kültür Bakanlığı, 1983.
Task Force on Education for Economic Growth. Action for Excellence. Washington, D.C.:
Education Commission of the United States, 1983.
13.2.1.6 One Volume of a Multi-Volume Work
In English-language text:
Chekhov, Anton. Bütün Hikâyeleri. Vol. 3. Ankara: Bilgi Yayınevi, 1974.
Ziegler, Alan. The Writing Workshop. Vol. 2. New York: Teachers and Writers, 1984.
In Turkish-language text:
Çehov, Anton. Bütün Hikâyeleri. 3. Cilt. Ankara: Bilgi Yayınevi, 1974.
Ziegler, Alan. The Writing Workshop. 2. Cilt. New York: Teachers and Writers, 1984.
The above are examples for using only one volume of a multi-volume work. If
you cite two or more volumes of a multi-volume work, give the total number of
volumes after the title. If the different volumes of the work were published in
different years, indicate as publication year, the year of the first volume, followed
by a hyphen and the year of the final volume. The Jaeger example below illustrates
this practice. If all volumes of the work have been published in the same year, you
need to indicate the year once. The Kantemir example below illustrates this
practice.
In English-language text:
Jaeger, Werner. Paideia: The Ideals of Greek Culture. 3 Vols. Oxford and New York:
Oxford University Press, 1967-1971.
Kantemir, Dimitri. Osmanlı İmparatorluğunun Yükseliş ve Çöküş Tarihi. 2 Vols. Istanbul:
Cumhuriyet, 1999.
In Turkish-language text:
Jaeger, Werner. Paideia: The Ideals of Greek Culture. 3 Cilt. Oxford ve New York:
Oxford University Press, 1967-1971.
Kantemir, Dimitri. Osmanlı İmparatorluğunun Yükseliş ve Çöküş Tarihi. 2 Cilt. İstanbul:
Cumhuriyet, 1999.
69
If each volume has an individual title, you may cite the work by that individual
title without including the volume number. But if you feel it may be useful to the
reader, you may add the information about the complete multi-volume work:
In English-language text:
Jaeger, Werner. Paideia: The Ideals of Greek Culture. Volume I: Archaic Greece. The
Mind of Athens. Oxford and New York: Oxford University Press, 1967.
---. Paideia: The Ideals of Greek Culture. Volume II: In Search of the Divine Centre.
Oxford and New York: Oxford University Press, 1971.
---. Paideia: The Ideals of Greek Culture. Volume III: The Conflict of Cultural Ideals in
the Age of Plato. Oxford and New York: Oxford University Press, 1971.
In Turkish-language text:
Jaeger, Werner. Paideia: The Ideals of Greek Culture. Volume I: Archaic Greece. The
Mind of Athens. Oxford ve New York: Oxford University Press, 1967.
---. Paideia: The Ideals of Greek Culture. Volume II: In Search of the Divine Centre.
Oxford ve New York: Oxford University Press, 1971.
---. Paideia: The Ideals of Greek Culture. Volume III: The Conflict of Cultural Ideals in
the Age of Plato. Oxford ve New York: Oxford University Press, 1971.
Since in the version above the volume numbers are part of the title, they are
not translated into Turkish. But if you think your Turkish reader would benefit
from the information, use a version that indicates such. In this case, the translated
volume designations are not italicised:
Jaeger, Werner. Paideia: The Ideals of Greek Culture. 1. Cilt: Archaic Greece. The Mind
of Athens. Oxford ve New York: Oxford University Press, 1967.
---. Paideia: The Ideals of Greek Culture. 2. Cilt: In Search of the Divine Centre. Oxford
ve New York: Oxford University Press, 1971.
---. Paideia: The Ideals of Greek Culture. 3. Cilt: The Conflict of Cultural Ideals in the Age
of Plato. Oxford ve New York: Oxford University Press, 1971.
13.2.1.7 Book with No Author
In English-language text:
Dünden Bugüne İstanbul Ansiklopedisi. Istanbul: Türkiye Ekonomik ve Toplumsal Tarih
Vakfı, 1993.
The World Almanac and Book of Facts. New York: Newspaper Enterprise Assoc., 1985.
70
In Turkish-language text:
Dünden Bugüne İstanbul Ansiklopedisi. İstanbul: Türkiye Ekonomik ve Toplumsal Tarih
Vakfı, 1993.
The World Almanac and Book of Facts. New York: Newspaper Enterprise Assoc., 1985.
Where there is no author, the book should be listed alphabetically according to
the first word in its title. However, if an English title begins with an article, i.e.,
with the words the, a, or an, these should be ignored and the title should be listed
according to its first main word. The same rule holds for titles in all languages that
have articles. In the above example The World Almanac would be listed under W.
Ludwig Tieck’s German title Der blonde Eckbert would be listed under B, and
the French Le roman de la rose would be listed under R.
13.2.1.8 Book with a Translator
In English-language text:
Machiavelli, Niccolò. Machiavelli: The Chief Works and Others. Trans. Allan Gilbert.
Durham, NC: Duke University Press, 1989.
Shakespeare, William. Tüm Soneler. Trans. Talât Sait Halman. Istanbul: Cem Yayınevi,
1989.
Werner Jaeger’s and Dimitri Kantemir’s books cited above, actually have a
translator, too:
Jaeger, Werner. Paideia: The Ideals of Greek Culture. Trans. Gilbert Highet. 3 Vols.
Oxford and New York: Oxford University Press, 1967-1971.
Kantemir, Dimitri. Osmanlı İmparatorluğunun Yükseliş ve Çöküş Tarihi. Trans. Özdemir
Çobanoğlu. 2 Vols. Istanbul: Cumhuriyet, 1999.
In Turkish-language text:
Jaeger, Werner. Paideia: The Ideals of Greek Culture. Çev. Gilbert Highet. 3 Cilt. Oxford
ve New York: Oxford University Press, 1967-1971.
Kantemir, Dimitri. Osmanlı İmparatorluğunun Yükseliş ve Çöküş Tarihi. Çev. Özdemir
Çobanoğlu. 2 Cilt. İstanbul: Cumhuriyet, 1999.
Machiavelli, Niccolò. Machiavelli: The Chief Works and Others. Çev. Alan Gilbert.
Durham, NC: Duke University Press, 1989.
Shakespeare, William. Tüm Soneler. Çev. Talât Sait Halman. İstanbul: Cem Yayınevi,
1989.
71
Depending on your purpose for citing the translation, you may list a book with
a translator by the translator’s name. For instance, in the bibliography of a
comparative study of translations of Machiavelli’s works into Turkish and English,
entries would be listed as in the following:
In English-language text:
Bondanella, Julia Conaway, and Peter Bondanella, trans. Niccolò Machiavelli: Discourses
on Livy. Oxford and New York: Oxford University Press, 1997.
Gilbert, Allan, trans. Machiavelli: The Chief Works and Others. Durham, NC: Duke
University Press, 1989.
Tatlıer, Anita, trans. Niccolò Machiavelli, Hükümdar: Prens. Istanbul: Göçebe Yayınları,
1997.
Teksoy, Rekin, trans. Niccolò Machiavelli: Prens. Istanbul: Oğlak Yayınları, 1999.
In Turkish-language text:
Bondanella, Julia Conaway, ve Peter Bondanella, çev. Niccolò Machiavelli: Discourses on
Livy. Oxford ve New York: Oxford University Press, 1997.
Gilbert, Allan, çev. Machiavelli: The Chief Works and Others. Durham, NC: Duke
University Press, 1989.
Tatlıer, Anita, çev. Niccolò Machiavelli, Hükümdar: Prens. İstanbul: Göçebe Yayınları,
1997.
Teksoy, Rekin, çev. Niccolò Machiavelli: Prens. İstanbul: Oğlak Yayınları, 1999.
13.2.1.9 An Edited Book
An ‘edition’ may refer to the work of one person (the author) prepared by
another person (the editor). In the standard entry of an edited work with one author,
the editor’s or editors’ name(s) are entered after the title of the work. The name of
the editor is preceded by the designation Ed., (meaning ‘Edited by’) in English and
Yay. Haz. (meaning ‘Yayına Hazırlayan’) in Turkish. The initial letters in Ed. and
Yay. Haz. are capitalised.
In English-language text:
Adıvar, Halide Edip. Mor Salkımlı Ev. Ed. Mehmet Kalpaklı and Gülbün Türkgeldi.
Istanbul: Özgür Yayınları, 1996.
Horney, Karen. Feminine Psychology. Ed. Harold Kelman. New York: Norton, 1973.
72
Kristeller, Paul Oskar. Renaissance Thought and Its Sources. Ed. Michael Mooney. New
York: Columbia University Press, 1979.
Shakespeare, William. The Comedy of Errors. Ed. Stanley Wells. London and New York:
Penguin Books, 1995.
In Turkish-language text:
Adıvar, Halide Edip. Mor Salkımlı Ev. Yay. Haz. Mehmet Kalpaklı ve Gülbün Türkgeldi.
İstanbul: Özgür Yayınları, 1996.
Horney, Karen. Feminine Psychology. Yay. Haz. Harold Kelman. New York: Norton,
1973.
Kristeller, Paul Oskar. Renaissance Thought and Its Sources. Yay. Haz. Michael Mooney.
New York: Columbia University Press, 1979.
Shakespeare, William. The Comedy of Errors. Yay. Haz. Stanley Wells. Londra ve New
York: Penguin Books, 1995.
An ‘edition’ may also refer to a volume of collected texts or articles written by
different authors. In this case, the entry is included under the editor’s name like an
author’s name. The editor’s name is inverted. It is followed by a comma and the
designationthis time with lowercase initialsed. or yay. haz..
In English-language text:
Akal, Cemal Bâli, ed. Devlet Kuramı. Ankara: Dost Kitabevi Yayınları, 2000.
Labalme, Patricia H., ed. Beyond Their Sex: Learned Women of the European Past. New
York and London: New York University Press, 1980.
In Turkish-language text:
Akal, Cemal Bâli, yay. haz. Devlet Kuramı. Ankara: Dost Kitabevi Yayınları, 2000.
Labalme, Patricia H., yay. haz. Beyond Their Sex: Learned Women of the European Past.
New York ve Londra: New York University Press, 1980.
Depending on your purpose for citing the edition, you may list an edited work
with a single author too, by the editor’s last name. For instance, in the bibliography
of a study of Christine de Pizan’s works, we may find the following:
In English-language text:
Blumenfeld-Kosinski, Renate, ed. The Selected Writings of Christine de Pizan. Trans.
Renate Blumenfeld-Kosinski and Kevin Brownlee. New York and London: Norton,
1997.
73
Willard, Charity Cannon, ed. The Writings of Christine de Pizan. New York: Persea
Books, 1994.
In Turkish-language text:
Blumenfeld-Kosinski, Renate, yay. haz. The Selected Writings of Christine de Pizan. Çev.
Renate Blumenfeld-Kosinski ve Kevin Brownlee. New York ve Londra: Norton,
1997.
Willard, Charity Cannon, yay. haz. The Writings of Christine de Pizan. New York: Persea
Books, 1994.
An anthology is an edited work with multiple authors. If you cite a complete
anthology, begin the entry with the editors:
In English-language text:
Wilbur, Richard, and W. H. Auden, ed. Nineteenth Century British Minor Poets. New
York: Dell, 1968.
Cemalcılar, İlhan, ed. Pazarlama. Seçilmiş Yazılar. Ankara: Eskişehir İktisadî ve İdarî
İlimler Akademisi Yayınları, 1968.
In Turkish-language text:
Wilbur, Richard, ve W. H. Auden, yay. haz. Nineteenth Century British Minor Poets. New
York: Dell, 1968.
Cemalcılar, İlhan, yay. haz. Pazarlama. Seçilmiş Yazılar. Ankara: Eskişehir İktisadî ve
İdarî İlimler Akademisi Yayınları, 1968.
13.2.1.10 Book with Multiple Translators
The translators’ names follow the title, and are given in the order in which they
appear on the cover or inside cover of the source publication.
In English-language text:
Gramsci, Antonio. Çocuklarıma Mektuplar. Trans. Meral Erez and Cemal Erez. Istanbul:
Belge Yayınları, 1979.
Lausberg, Heinrich. Handbook of Literary Rhetoric. A Foundation for Literary Study. Ed.
David E. Orton and R. Dean Anderson. Trans. Matthew T. Bliss, Annemiek Jansen,
and David E. Orton. Leiden, Boston, and Cologne: Brill, 1998.
In Turkish-language text:
Gramsci, Antonio. Çocuklarıma Mektuplar. Çev. Meral Erez ve Cemal Erez. İstanbul:
Belge Yayınları, 1979.
74
Lausberg, Heinrich. Handbook of Literary Rhetoric. A Foundation for Literary Study. Yay.
Haz. David E. Orton ve R. Dean Anderson. Çev. Matthew T. Bliss, Annemiek
Jansen, ve David E. Orton. Leiden, Boston, ve Köln: Brill, 1998.
13.2.1.11 Book with Multiple Editors
In English-language text:
a. Shakespeare, William. The Complete Works. 3 Vols. Ed. Stanley Wells and Gary
Taylor. Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1986.
b. Wells, Stanley, and Gary Taylor, ed. William Shakespeare: The Complete Works. 3
Vols. Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1986.
In Turkish-language text:
a. Shakespeare, William. The Complete Works. 3 Cilt. Yay. Haz. Stanley Wells ve Gary
Taylor. Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1986.
b. Wells, Stanley, ve Gary Taylor, yay. haz. William Shakespeare: The Complete Works.
3 Cilt. Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1986.
In English-language text:
Balaban, Mira, Kemal Ebcioğlu, and Otto Laske, ed. Understanding Music with AI:
Perspectives on Music Cognition. Cambridge, Mass.: MIT Press, 1992.
Winnicott, D. W. Psycho-Analytic Explorations. Ed. Clare Winnicott, Ray Shepherd, and
Madeleine Davis. Cambridge, Mass.: Harvard University Press, 2000.
In Turkish-language text:
Balaban, Mira, Kemal Ebcioğlu, ve Otto Laske, yay. haz. Understanding Music with AI:
Perspectives on Music Cognition. Cambridge, Mass.: MIT Press, 1992.
Winnicott, D. W. Psycho-Analytic Explorations. Yay. Haz. Clare Winnicott, Ray
Shepherd, ve Madeleine Davis. Cambridge, Mass.: Harvard University Press, 2000.
13.2.1.12 Book with an Editor and Translator
In English-language text:
a. Beauvoir, Simone de. Le deuxième sexe: The Second Sex. Ed. and Trans. H. M.
Parshley. New York: Vintage Books, 1997.
Poulantzas, Nicos. Faşizm ve Diktatörlük. Trans. Ahmet İnsel. Ed. Murat Belge.
Istanbul: Birikim Yayınları, 1975.
b.
Parshley, H. M., ed. and trans. Simone de Beauvoir. Le deuxième sexe: The Second
Sex. New York: Vintage Books, 1997.
75
İnsel, Ahmet, trans. Nicos Poulantzas: Faşizm ve Diktatörlük. Ed. Murat Belge.
Istanbul: Birikim Yayınları, 1975.
c.
Belge, Murat, ed. Nicos Poulantzas: Faşizm ve Diktatörlük. Trans. Ahmet İnsel.
Istanbul: Birikim Yayınları, 1975.
In Turkish-language text:
a.
Beauvoir, Simone de. Le deuxième sexe: The Second Sex. Yay. Haz. ve Çev. H. M.
Parshley. New York: Vintage Books, 1997.
Poulantzas, Nicos. Faşizm ve Diktatörlük. Çev. Ahmet İnsel. Yay. Haz. Murat Belge.
İstanbul: Birikim Yayınları, 1975.
b.
Parshley, H. M., yay. haz. ve çev. Simone de Beauvoir. Le deuxième sexe: The Second
Sex. New York: Vintage Books, 1997.
İnsel, Ahmet, çev. Nicos Poulantzas: Faşizm ve Diktatörlük. Yay. Haz. Murat Belge.
İstanbul: Birikim Yayınları, 1975.
c.
Belge, Murat, yay. haz. Nicos Poulantzas: Faşizm ve Diktatörlük. Çev. Ahmet İnsel.
İstanbul: Birikim Yayınları, 1975.
13.2.1.13 Book with an Introduction
Frequently, an important introductory essay written by an author other than the
author, editor, and/or translator of the book is indicated in the bibliographical entry:
In English-language text:
Alloula, Malek. The Colonial Harem. Trans. Myrna Godzich and Wlad Godzich.
Introduction by Barbara Harlow. Minneapolis: University of Minnesota Press, 1986.
Dickens, Charles. Great Expectations. Introduction by George Bernard Shaw. New York:
Limited Editions Club, 1937.
Freud, Anna. Selected Writings by Anna Freud. Ed., with Introductions, by Richard Ekins
and Ruth Freeman. London: Penguin, 1998.
In Turkish-language text:
Alloula, Malek. The Colonial Harem. Çev. Myrna Godzich ve Wlad Godzich. Barbara
Harlow’un Önsözü ile. Minneapolis: University of Minnesota Press, 1986.
Dickens, Charles. Great Expectations. George Bernard Shaw’un Önsözü ile. New York:
Limited Editions Club, 1937.
Freud, Anna. Selected Writings by Anna Freud. Yay. Haz. ve Önsöz: Richard Ekins ve
Ruth Freeman. Londra: Penguin, 1998.
76
13.2.1.14 Book with Repeated or Revised Editions
When you are using a printing of a book that is not the first, indicate both
when the book was first printed and the year of the print you are using.
The following is the model for a book whose first and current printings were
executed by the same publisher:
In English-language text:
Posner, Richard A. Antitrust Law. An Economic Perspective. Chicago: The University of
Chicago Press, 1976; 1984.
In Turkish-language text:
Posner, Richard A. Antitrust Law. An Economic Perspective. Chicago: The University of
Chicago Press, 1976; 1984.
The following is the model for a book whose first and current printings were
executed by different publishers. The current publisher first printed the book in
1965; the author of the bibliography is using the 1977 re-printing:
In English-language text:
Dickens, Charles. Great Expectations. 1861. Harmondsworth, UK: Penguin Books, 1965;
1977.
In Turkish-language text:
Dickens, Charles. Great Expectations. 1861. Harmondsworth, UK: Penguin Books, 1965;
1977.
In the revised edition of a work, the first edition is reprinted with alterations:
In English-language text:
Klein, Melanie. The Psycho-Analysis of Children. Trans. Alix Strachey. Rev. Ed. Alix
Strachey and H. A. Thorner. New York: Vintage, 1997.
Vergine, Lea. Body Art and Performance: The Body as Language. 1974. Rev. Ed. Milan:
Skira, 2000.
In Turkish-language text:
Klein, Melanie. The Psycho-Analysis of Children. Çev. Alix Strachey. Gözden geçirilmiş
yeni bas. Alix Strachey ve H. A. Thorner. New York: Vintage, 1997.
Vergine, Lea. Body Art and Performance: The Body as Language. 1974. Gözden
geçirilmiş yeni bas. Milano: Skira, 2000.
77
The entry for Vergine’s work indicates that the volume was first published in
1974 by an establishment other than Skira. In 2000, Skira published, for the first
time, the revised edition.
If, for a particular reason, you need to indicate the original publisher as well,
follow the model below:
In English-language text:
Vergine, Lea. Body Art and Performance: The Body as Language. Milan: G. Prearo, 1974.
Rev. Ed. Milan: Skira, 2000.
In Turkish-language text:
Vergine, Lea. Body Art and Performance: The Body as Language. Milano: G. Prearo,
1974. Gözden geçirilmiş yeni bas. Milano: Skira, 2000.
14.2.2
Citing Part of a Book
The form for citing a part of a book (a chapter in a book, an article in an edited
volume, an essay in a reference work, a literary work in a volume of collected
works, and the like) is the following:
Author. “Title of Article or Chapter.” Title of Book. Ed. Editor’s Name. Place of
Publication: Publisher, Year. Pages.
13.2.2.1 Chapter or Article in One-Author Book
When you use particular chapter or chapters in a one-author volume that has
no editor:
In English-language text:
Kott, Jan. “The Two Hells of Doctor Faustus: A Polytheatrical Vision.” The Bottom
Translation. Trans. Daniela Miedzyrzecka and Lillian Valle. Evanston, Ill.:
Northwestern Universiy Press, 1987. 3-27.
Uğur, Aydın. “Soylu Evlenmesi.” Keşfedilmemiş Kıta: Günlük Yaşam ve Zihniyet
Kalıplarımız. Istanbul: İletişim Yayınları, 1991. 79-85.
In Turkish-language text:
Kott, Jan. “The Two Hells of Doctor Faustus: A Polytheatrical Vision.” The Bottom
Translation. Çev. Daniela Miedzyrzecka ve Lillian Valle. Evanston, Ill.:
Northwestern Universiy Press, 1987. 3-27.
Uğur, Aydın. “Soylu Evlenmesi.” Keşfedilmemiş Kıta: Günlük Yaşam ve Zihniyet
Kalıplarımız. İstanbul: İletişim Yayınları, 1991. 79-85.
78
13.2.2.2 Chapter or Article in Edited Volume
The following are example for citing a part of a single-author edited work:
In English-language text:
Kristeller, Paul Oskar. “The Modern System of the Arts.” Renaissance Thought and Its
Sources. Ed. Michael Mooney. New York: Columbia University Press, 1979. 163227.
Tanpınar, Ahmet Hamdi. Letter No. 56. Tanpınar’ın Mektupları. Ed. Zeynep Kerman.
Istanbul: Dergâh Yayınları, 1974; 1992. 167-68.
In Turkish-language text:
Kristeller, Paul Oskar. “The Modern System of the Arts.” Renaissance Thought and Its
Sources. Yay. Haz. Michael Mooney. New York: Columbia University Press, 1979.
163-227.
Tanpınar, Ahmet Hamdi. Mektup Nr. 56. Tanpınar’ın Mektupları. Yay. Haz. Zeynep
Kerman. İstanbul: Dergâh Yayınları, 1974; 1992. 167-68.
The following are examples for citing a part of a multi-author edited work:
In English-language text:
Clausen, John. “The Life Course of Individuals.” In Aging and Society. Ed. M. W. Riley,
M. Johnson, and A. Foner. New York: Russell Sage, 1972. 457-514.
Morris, William. “The Haystack in the Floods.” In Nineteenth Century British Minor
Poets. Ed. Richard Wilbur and W. H. Auden. New York: Dell, 1968. 265-79.
In Turkish-language text:
Clausen, John. “The Life Course of Individuals”: Aging and Society içinde. Yay. Haz. M.
W. Riley, M. Johnson, ve A. Foner. New York: Russell Sage, 1972. 457-514.
Morris, William. “The Haystack in the Floods”: Nineteenth Century British Minor Poets
içinde. Yay Haz. Richard Wilbur ve W. H. Auden. New York: Dell, 1968. 265-79.
13.2.2.3 Essay in a Reference Work; Entry in a Dictionary or
Encyclopaedia
It is not necessary to give full publication information for familiar reference
works (encyclopaedias and dictionaries). If an article is initialled, check in the
index of authors (in the opening section of each volume) for the author’s full name
and enter it as you would the author’s name for any publication.
In English-language text:
“Ethnocentrism.” Webster’s New Universal Unabridged Dictionary. 1983 ed.
79
“Jamaica.” Encyclopaedia Britannica. 1999 ed.
Sarç, Ömer Celal. “Millî Gelir.” Ak İktisat Ansiklopedisi. 1973 ed.
“Yalılar.” Dünden Bugüne İstanbul Ansiklopedisi. 1994 ed.
In Turkish-language text:
“Ethnocentrism.” Webster’s New Universal Unabridged Dictionary. 1983 bas.
“Jamaica.” Encyclopaedia Britannica. 1999 bas.
Sarç, Ömer Celal. “Millî Gelir.” Ak İktisat Ansiklopedisi. 1973 bas.
“Yalılar.” Dünden Bugüne İstanbul Ansiklopedisi. 1994 bas.
13.2.2.4 An Introduction, Preface, Foreword, or Afterword
If you use the edition of a work for the editor’s Introduction, Preface,
Foreword, or Afterword alone, enter the volume by the editor’s, rather than the
author’s name.
In English-language text:
Madra, Ömer. Introduction. Oğuz Atay: Tutunamayanlar. Istanbul: İletişim Yayınları,
1984. vii-x.
Shaw, George Bernard. Introduction. Charles Dickens: Great Expectations. New York:
Limited Editions Club, 1937. 1-17.
In Turkish-language text:
Madra, Ömer. Önsöz. Oğuz Atay: Tutunamayanlar. İstanbul: İletişim Yayınları, 1984. viix.
Shaw, George Bernard. Önsöz. Charles Dickens: Great Expectations. New York: Limited
Editions Club, 1937. 1-17.
80
13.2.2.5 Literary Work in a Volume of Collected Works
In English-language text:
Shakespeare, William. “As You Like It.” The Riverside Shakespeare. 2nd Ed. Ed. G.
Blakemore Evans, et al. Boston and New York: Houghton Mifflin, 1997. 399-436.
---. “Onikinci Gece.” Toplu Oyunları 1: Kısasa Kısas, Onikinci Gece, Venedik Taciri.
Trans. Zeynep Avcı. Istanbul: MitosBoyut Yayınları, 1996. 85-174.
In Turkish-language text:
Shakespeare, William. “As You Like It.” The Riverside Shakespeare. 2. Bas. Yay. Haz. G.
Blakemore Evans, vd. Boston ve New York: Houghton Mifflin, 1997. 399-436.
---. “Onikinci Gece.” Toplu Oyunları 1: Kısasa Kısas, Onikinci Gece, Venedik Taciri. Çev.
Zeynep Avcı. İstanbul: MitosBoyut Yayınları, 1996. 85-174.
13.2.2.6 Cross-Referencing
To avoid unnecessary repetition when citing two or more entries from a larger
collection, you may cite the collection once with complete publication information
(as in the Hall and Çeker entries below). The individual entries (as in the Abbey
and Baldwin, Gürpınar and Kutlar entries below) can then be cross-referenced (or,
cross-listed) by author, title, last name of the editor of the collection, title of the
collection, and page numbers.
In English-language text:
Abbey, Edward. “The Most Beautiful Place on Earth.” Hall, ed. The Contemporary Essay.
225-41.
Baldwin, James. “Notes of a Native Son.” Hall, ed. The Contemporary Essay. 164-83.
Çeker, Alper, ed. Kedi Hikâyeleri. Istanbul: Parantez Yayınları, 1995.
Gürpınar, Hüseyin Rahmi. “Kedi Yüzünden.” Çeker, ed. Kedi Hikâyeleri. 30-34.
Hall, Donald, ed. The Contemporary Essay. New York: Bedford-St. Martin Press, 1984.
Kutlar, Onat. “Kediler.” Çeker, ed. Kedi Hikâyeleri. 112-124.
In Turkish-language text:
Abbey, Edward. “The Most Beautiful Place on Earth.” Hall, yay. haz. The Contemporary
Essay. 225-41.
Baldwin, James. “Notes of a Native Son.” Hall, yay. haz. The Contemporary Essay. 16483.
81
Çeker, Alper, yay. haz. Kedi Hikâyeleri. İstanbul: Parantez Yayınları, 1995.
Gürpınar, Hüseyin Rahmi. “Kedi Yüzünden.” Çeker, yay. haz. Kedi Hikâyeleri. 30-34.
Hall, Donald, yay haz. The Contemporary Essay. New York: Bedford-St. Martin Press,
1984.
Kutlar, Onat. “Kediler.” Çeker, yay. haz. Kedi Hikâyeleri. 112-124.
13.2.3 The Form of an Entry for a Periodical Publication
The bibliographical entry for a periodical publication (süreli yayın) has four
main divisions entered in the order of, author, title of article, title of periodical,
serial information and date, page number. The last item is omitted for citations
from newspapers.
13.2.3.1 Article in an Academic Journal
As in the entry for a book, single-space after every period, comma, and colon.
The title of a journal article is placed in double quotation marks, and ends with a
period placed inside the closing quotation mark. The title of the journal is
underlined or italicised. There is no period following the journal title but you must
skip a space after it. Most journals carry a volume and an issue number. Following
the journal title, type the volume number, followed by a colon and a blank space,
and enter the issue number. Some journals indicate a volume number alone, in
which case only the latter is entered. The publication date, placed in parentheses,
reproduces the information given on the cover or inside cover of the journal: thus, a
journal’s publication date may be indicated as year alone, as season and year, or as
month and year. Use the designation indicated in the journal. The parentheses
indicating date are followed by a colon and a blank space. The final element
consists of the initial and final page numbers of the article followed by a period.
In English-language text:
Çaylan, Esra. “A Europe for All.” Perceptions 5: 2 (June-August 2000): 33-43.
Gökyay, Orhan Şaik. “Divan Edebiyatında Çiçekler III.” Tarih ve Toplum 14: 79
(1990): 18-23.
McWeeny, Gage. “The Primal Seen: Captain Cook and Cannibal Visions at
Hawaii.” Critical Matrix 11 (1997): 160-79.
82
Muecke, Marjorie A. “An Explication of ‘Wind Illness’ in Northern Thailand.”
Culture, Medicine and Psychiatry 3: 3 (1979): 267-300.
Wells, Kathryn. “Turkish Liquidity Squeeze Hits Bonds.” Central European 10: 10
(December 2000-January 2001): 9-10.
In Turkish-language text:
Çaylan, Esra. “A Europe for All.” Perceptions 5: 2 (Haziran-Ağustos 2000): 33-43.
Gökyay, Orhan Şaik. “Divan Edebiyatında Çiçekler III.” Tarih ve Toplum 14: 79
(1990): 18-23.
McWeeny, Gage. “The Primal Seen: Captain Cook and Cannibal Visions at
Hawaii.” Critical Matrix 11 (1997): 160-79.
Muecke, Marjorie A. “An Explication of ‘Wind Illness’ in Northern Thailand.”
Culture, Medicine and Psychiatry 3: 3 (1979): 267-300.
Wells, Kathryn. “Turkish Liquidity Squeeze Hits Bonds.” Central European 10: 10
(December 2000-January 2001): 9-10.
13.2.3.2 Signed Article in a Magazine
The entry for a signed article in a magazine follows the order of the journal
article. The difference is that volume and issue numbers are lacking, and the full
publication date is indicated.
In English-language text:
Alperowicz, Natasha. “Petkim to Be Privatised This Year.” Chemical Week 24 January
2001. 15.
Gorvett, Jon. “Turk-Telecom: The Jewel in Turkey’s Privatisation Crown.” Middle East
March 2001. 31-33.
Güloğlu, Oktar M. “İnsuyu Mağarası” Gezi January 1999. 99-107.
Kışlalı, Murat. “En Büyük Sorun Yüksek Faizler.” Kapital April 1998. 70-72.
Matthews, Tom. “What Can Be Done?” Newsweek 21 March 1988. 57-58.
Whitman, David. “Hope for the Homeless.” U.S. News and World Report 29 February
1988. 26-35.
83
In Turkish-language text:
Alperowicz, Natasha. “Petkim to Be Privatised This Year.” Chemical Week 24 Ocak 2001.
15.
Gorvett, Jon. “Turk-Telecom: The Jewel in Turkey’s Privatisation Crown.” Middle East
Mart 2001. 31-33.
Güloğlu, Oktar M. “İnsuyu Mağarası” Gezi Ocak 1999. 99-107.
Kışlalı, Murat. “En Büyük Sorun Yüksek Faizler.” Kapital Nisan 1998. 70-72.
Matthews, Tom. “What Can Be Done?” Newsweek 21 Mart 1988. 57-58.
Whitman, David. “Hope for the Homeless.” U.S. News and World Report 29 Şubat 1988.
26-35.
13.2.3.3 Unsigned Article in a Magazine
As with a book without an author, an unsigned article in a magazine is entered
by the title.
In English-language text:
“Apple’dan Yeni Atılımlar, Yeni Planlar.” PC World Türkiye April 1998. 86.
“Handball from the Fund.” The Economist 7 July 2001. 70.
“Then There’s Rent Control.” The New Republic 11 April 1988. 22.
In Turkish-language text:
“Apple’dan Yeni Atılımlar, Yeni Planlar.” PC World Türkiye Nisan 1998. 86.
“Handball from the Fund.” The Economist 7 Temmuz 2001. 70.
“Then There’s Rent Control.” The New Republic 11 Nisan 1988. 22.
13.2.3.4 Newspaper Article
The entry for a newspaper article is like that of a magazine. The full date is
entered in the order of day, month, year.
In English-language text:
“I.M.F. Decision on Loan to Turkey Is Delayed.” New York Times 3 July 2001.
“IMF Delays on Installment for Turkey.” Wall Street Journal 3 July 2001.
Karp, Jonathan. “Brazil to Ask IMF to Add to Assistance.” Wall Street Journal 24 July
2001.
84
In Turkish-language text:
“I.M.F. Decision on Loan to Turkey Is Delayed.” New York Times 3 Temmuz 2001.
“IMF Delays on Installment for Turkey.” Wall Street Journal 3 Temmuz 2001.
Karp, Jonathan. “Brazil to Ask IMF to Add to Assistance.” Wall Street Journal 24
Temmuz 2001.
The entry for Ottoman newspapers follows the same form. Where the
newspaper has a number, supply the number as well:
Cerîde-i Havâdis. 20 Şaban 1267. No. 536.
Names of months in the Ottoman calendar are not translated. However, some
dissertation supervisors may require the conversion of the year. Indicate the
conversion in brackets:
Cerîde-i Havâdis. 20 Şaban 1267 [1850/1]. No. 536.
13.2.4
Electronic Sources
In today’s computer dominated world more and more information is being
produced and stored using the new technology. Information is now being spread
via electronic sources, most notably the World Wide Web, CD ROMs, computer
software, and electronic-mail (e-mail). Even in this age when information runs
rampant, researchers must cite the sources. This can be difficult because new
technology, and methods of spreading information, are advancing so rapidly.
Documentation styles respond to these changes by producing new updated
guidelines on an almost yearly basis.
13.2.4.1 Online Journal and Magazine Articles
With the development of new technology publishing companies have begun to
use the World Wide Web by producing on-line editions of well established journals
and magazines. Also there are now a number of on-line only journals and
magazines. As a general rule when placing an on-line journal article on your
bibliography the entry assumes the same form as a print journal or magazine but
with the Web page of the publication added at the end.
85
For on-line journals and magazines two dates are written. First the date the
article is written in parentheses, second the date the on-line journal or magazine
was accessed which follows the page number or paragraph information.
The form for an online journal article is the following:
Author. “Title of Article.” Title of Journal Volume No.: Issue No. (Year): Pages/
Paragraphs. Date of Access electronic address.
The indication “9 Pars.” in the first English entry below, and “9 Para.” in the
Turkish entry, mean “9 paragraphs.” Established and academically recognised online journals segment print in pages or paragraphs.
In English-language text:
Inada, Kenneth. “A Buddhist Response to the Nature of Human Rights.” Journal of
Buddhist Ethics 2 (1995): 9 Pars. 29 August 2000 http://jbe.la.psu.edu/2/
inada1.html.
Johnson, Helen. “Spice Girls?” Feminista 2: 11 (March-April 1999): 30 August 2000
http://www.feminista.com/v2n11/johnson.html.
In Turkish-language text:
Inada, Kenneth. “A Buddhist Response to the Nature of Human Rights.” Journal of
Buddhist Ethics 2 (1995): 9 Para. 29 Ağustos 2000 http://jbe.la.psu.edu/2/
inada1.html.
Johnson, Helen. “Spice Girls?” Feminista 2: 11 (March-April 1999): 30 Ağustos 2000
http://www.feminista.com/v2n11/johnson.html.
13.2.4.2 Online Databases
Another important source of information for today’s researcher is the online
database. Whereas the online journal provides the surfer with access to only that
particular journal (or possibly links to other works by the same publisher), the
online database is a collection of work from a whole variety of sources, including
magazines, newspapers, academic journals, etc. The information can be stored as
abstracts, full text, and even as a selection of the ‘best part’. The İstanbul Bilgi
University Library offers a rich array of databases in disciplines included in the
University curriculum. The form for citing an electronic database is the following:
Author. “Title of Article.” Relevant information for the database. Date of access electronic
address for retrieval.
86
In English-language text:
Esen, Oğuz. “Financial Openness in Turkey.” International Review of Applied Economics.
14: 1 (January 2000): 5-23. Master FILE Premier. 30 August 2000.
http://ehostvgw5.epnet.com/ehost1.asp?key=204.179.122.141_ 8000_2011029098&return=n&site=ehost.
Mango, Andrew. “Turkey in Winter.” Middle Eastern Studies 31: 3 (July 1995). Proquest.
31 August 2000. http://proquest.u mi.com/pdqweb.
In Turkish-language text:
Esen, Oğuz. “Financial Openness in Turkey.” International Review of Applied Economics.
14: 1 (Ocak 2000): 5-23. Master FILE Premier. 30 Ağustos 2000.
http://ehostvgw5.epnet.com/ehost1.asp?key=204.179.122.141_ 8000_2011029098&return=n&site=ehost.
Mango, Andrew. “Turkey in Winter.” Middle Eastern Studies 31: 3 (Temmuz 1995).
Proquest. 31 Ağustos 2000. http://proquest.u mi.com/pdqweb.
Provide the bibliographic data for the original source as for any other of its
genre, then add the name of the database along with relevant retrieval data such as
version number and/or transcript or abstract number.
13.2.4.3 Web Page
Web pages are also an important source, but can be a headache for researchers
who need to put them in their Bibliography or Works Cited list because very often
they are anonymous. As a general rule, if there is no author, follow the same rules
as for a book without an author by placing it alphabetically according to the page’s
title. Here too, it is necessary to include two dates in your listing. First the date the
page was posted/created, or last revised/updated; and secondly the date you
accessed the page.
The form for citing a Web page is the following.
Author. Name of Page. Date of Posting/Revision. Name of institution or organisation
affiliated with the site. Date of access electronic address.
In English-language text:
Daly, Bill. Writing Argumentative Essays. 1997. 26 June 1998 http://www.eslplanet.
com/teachertools/argueweb/frntpage.html.
Felluga, Dino. Undergraduate Guide to Literary Theory. 17 December 1999. Purdue
University. 15 November 2000 http://omni.cc.purdue.edu%7efellga/theory2.
87
In Turkish-language text:
Daly, Bill. Writing Argumentative Essays. 1997. 26 Haziran 1998 http://www.eslplanet.
com/teachertools/argueweb/frntpage.htm.
Felluga, Dino. Undergraduate Guide to Literary Theory. 17 Aralık 1999. Purdue
University. 15 Kasım 2000 http://omni.cc.purdue.edu%7efellga/theory2.
13.2.4.4 CD-ROM
The form for listing an individual CD-ROM among your sources is the
following:
Author/editor. Title of Print Version of Work. Edition statement (if given). Place of
publication: publisher, date. Title of Electronic Work. Medium. Information supplier.
File identifier or number. Access date.
Ateş, Toktamış. Toktamış Ateş CD-ROM’da. CD-ROM. Izmir: Açısoft Yayıncılık, 1998.
Clark, Jeffrey K. “Complications in Academia: Sexual Harassment and the Law.” Siecus
Report. 21:6 (1993): 6-10. CD-ROM. 1994 SIRS. SIRS 1993 School. Volume 4.
Article 93A.
Oxford English Dictionary Computer File: On Compact Disc. 2nd Ed. CD-ROM. Oxford:
Oxford University Press, 1992.
Article in a reference database on CD-ROM:
“World War II.” Encarta. DC-ROM. Seattle: Microsoft, 1999.
The above given model is valid for use in English- as well as Turkish-language
texts.
Article from a periodically published database on CD-ROM:
Reed, William. “Whites and the Entertainment Industry.” Tennessee Tribune 25 December
1996: 28. Ethnic Newswatch. CD-ROM. Data Technologies. February 1997.
13.2.4.5 Electronic-Mail (e-mail)
The reference format for an e-mail is similar to that used for personal
interviews. If the e-mail message has a title, indicate it as the title of the
‘publication’. If it has no title, indicate ‘No title’. In this case simply give a
description of to whom the e-mail was written.
88
In English-language text:
Tilton, Martin. “Re: Meeting Agenda for Friday.” E-mail to Norit Berman. 18 June 1999.
If the e-mail was sent to you, the author:
Javitch, Daniel. “Re: Your Query About Ariosto.” E-mail to the author. 17 May 1999.
In Turkish-language text:
Tilton, Martin. “Re: Meeting Agenda for Friday.” Norit Berman’a e-mektup. 18 Haziran
1999.
If the e-mail was sent to you, the author:
Javitch, Daniel. “Re: Your Query About Ariosto.” Yazara e-mektup. 17 May 1999.
13.2.4.6 Online Posting or Bulletin Board Posting
The World Wide Web provides a variety of ways for making voices and
opinions heard. Although increasing numbers of people are creating their own Web
pages, there is an easier way to put information onto the Web. Many Web pages
have discussion or bulletin board facilities where one can post his or her ideas,
responses to current debates/issues, announce meetings, etc. These boards can
prove extremely useful for researchers. Again, two dates are required, first the date
the message was posted, and secondly the date it was viewed by the researcher.
The form for citing online postings is the following:
Author. “Title of Posting.” Online Posting. Date when material was posted. Name of
listserver. Date of Access. electronic address.
In English-language text:
Mande, William M. “Critique of Capitalism.” Online Posting. 23 August 2000. The
Golem. 31 August 2000. http://pnews.org/boards/capitalism/messages/46.html.
In Turkish-language text:
Mande, William M. “Critique of Capitalism.” Online İlan. 23 Ağustos 2000. The Golem.
31 Ağustos 2000. http://pnews.org/boards/capitalism/messages/46.html.
13.2.4.7 Computer Software
At the end of an entry of computer software, add any information needed for
operation—the system for which the program is designed (IBM PC-DOS 2.0), the
units of memory (256KB), and the program form (disk, cassette, cartridge).
89
In English-language text:
Kazancı Hukuk Otomasyon. Computer software. Kazancı Hukuk Kaynakları, 1998.
Akrobat Reader 3.0, 2MB, Disk.
Wordstar Professional. Vers. 4. Computer software. MicroPro, 1987. IBM PC-DOS 2.0,
256KB, Disk.
In Turkish-language text:
Kazancı Hukuk Otomasyon. Bilgisayar yazılımı. Kazancı Hukuk Kaynakları, 1998.
Akrobat Reader 3.0, 2MB, Disk.
Wordstar Professional. Vers. 4. Bilgisayar yazılımı. MicroPro, 1987. IBM PC-DOS 2.0,
256KB, Disk.
13.2.5 Media Other Than the Electronic
13.2.5.1 Television and Radio Programmes
If your reference is primarily to the work of an individual, cite that person
before the title. Otherwise, other pertinent information (writer, director, producer,
narrator, etc.) may be given after the main title of the program (underlined). If no
person’s (author’s) name is citable, as in books with no author, list entry directly
under the title of the programme.
In English-language text:
“An Interview with Sadat.” 60 Minutes. CBS. WITI, Milwaukee. 11 November 1979.
“The Blessing Way.” The X-Files. Fox. WXIA, Atlanta. 19 July 1998.
“Prof. Dr. Aysel Çelikel ile Söyleşi.” 45 Dakika. Flaş TV. Istanbul. 5 July 1999.
In Turkish-language text:
“An Interview with Sadat.” 60 Minutes. CBS. WITI, Milwaukee. 11 Kasım 1979.
“The Blessing Way.” The X-Files. Fox. WXIA, Atlanta. 19 Temmuz 1998.
“Prof. Dr. Aysel Çelikel ile Söyleşi.” 45 Dakika. Flaş TV. İstanbul. 5 Temmuz 1999.
13.2.5.2 Sound Recording
FA 2483 in the second entry below refers to the catalogue number. A person
cited first in a recording (the composer, conductor, performer, etc.) depends on the
reason for the entry. If citing jacket notes, give the author’s name, the title of the
90
material (if given), and the words ‘Jacket Notes’ before the regular bibliographic
information.
In English-language text:
Erener, Sertab. Sertab. Sony Music. COL 4944712, 1999.
Guthrie, Woody. Woody Guthrie Sings Folk Songs. With Leadbelly, Cisco Houston, Sonny
Terry, and Bess Hawes. Intro. by Pete Seeger. Folkways Records, FA 2483, 1962.
U2. All That You Can’t Leave Behind. Interscope, 2000.
In Turkish-language text:
Erener, Sertab. Sertab. Sony Music. COL 4944712, 1999.
Guthrie, Woody. Woody Guthrie Sings Folk Songs. Leadbelly, Cisco Houston, Sonny
Terry, ve Bess Hawes ile. Giriş: Pete Seeger. Folkways Records, FA 2483, 1962.
U2. All That You Can’t Leave Behind. Interscope, 2000.
13.2.5.3 Film
If relevant to your use of it, cite the size and length of the film after the date. If
your research and focus require it, instead of the title, you may list the entry under
the director’s, and performers’, and others’ names.
In English-language text:
Dünyayı Kurtaran Adam. Dir. Çetin İnanç. Perf. Cüneyt Arkın and Aytekin Akkaya. Anıt
Film, 1982.
Rebel without a Cause. Dir. Nicholas Ray. Perf. James Dean, Natalie Wood, Sal Mineo,
and Dennis Hopper. Warner, 1955.
The 13th Warrior. Dir. John McTiernan. Perf. Antonio Banderas. Touchstone Pictures,
1999.
In Turkish-language text:
Dünyayı Kurtaran Adam. Yön. Çetin İnanç. Oynayanlar: Cüneyt Arkın ve Aytekin
Akkaya. Anıt Film, 1982.
Rebel without a Cause. Yön. Nicholas Ray. Oynayanlar: James Dean, Natalie Wood, Sal
Mineo, ve Dennis Hopper. Warner, 1955.
The 13th Warrior. Yön. John McTiernan. Oynayanlar: Antonio Banderas. Touchstone
Pictures, 1999.
91
13.2.5.4 Filmstrips, Slide Programmes, and Videotapes
Cite the medium (videorecording, DVD, slide programme, etc.) and any other
relevant technical information after the title. In a study on the works of Fellini, 8 ½
would be listed under ‘Fellini’.
In English-language text:
8 ½. Dir. Federico Fellini. Prod. Angelo Rizzoli. Cinematography Gianni di Venanzo. Ed.
Loe Cattozzo. Mus. Nino Rotta. Perf. Marcello Mastroianni, Claudia Cardinale,
Anouk Aimée, Sandra Milo, and Rosella Falk. Video recording (VHS). 138 mins.
Italian with English subtitles. London: Connoisseur Video, 1962.
Oryantal Show. Video recording. Dansözler: Hazar, Ebru, Anıl. Istanbul: Dicle Film
Video, Kod 1753, 1996.
In Turkish-language text:
8 ½. Yön. Federico Fellini. Prod. Angelo Rizzoli. Cinematografi Gianni di Venanzo. Yay.
Haz. Loe Cattozzo. Müzik Nino Rotta. Oynayanlar: Marcello Mastroianni, Claudia
Cardinale, Anouk Aimée, Sandra Milo, and Rosella Falk. Video Kayıt (VHS). 138
dak. İtalyanca; İngilizce altyazılı. Londra: Connoisseur Video, 1962.
Oryantal Show. Videokaset. Dansözler: Hazar, Ebru, Anıl. İstanbul: Dicle Film Video,
Kod 1753, 1996.
13.2.5.5 Performance
If your focus requires it, the citation may be listed under the name of the
director, composer, and others’ name.
In English-language text:
Düdüklüde Kıymalı Bamya. By Memet Baydur. Dir. İlkay Akdağlı. Kenterler Tiyatrosu,
Istanbul. 24 December 1998.
Les Misérables. By Alain Boublil and Claude-Michel Schonberg. Dir. Trevor Nunn and
John Caird. Broadway Theatre, New York. 5 April 1988. Based on Victor Hugo’s
Les Misérables.
In Turkish-language text:
Düdüklüde Kıymalı Bamya. Yaz. Memet Baydur. Yön. İlkay Akdağlı. Kenterler Tiyatrosu,
İstanbul. 24 Aralık 1998.
Les Misérables. Yaz. Alain Boublil ve Claude-Michel Schonberg. Yön. Trevor Nunn ve
John Caird. Broadway Theatre, New York. 5 Nisan 1988. Victor Hugo’nun romanı
Les Misérables’dan uyarlama.
92
13.2.5.6 Musical Composition
Notice that in the examples below, the composition itself is cited, not any
particular performance or recording of it. Do not underline a composition known
only by form, number, and key.
In English-language text:
Beethoven, Ludwig van. Symphony no. 8 in F, op. 93.
Rey, Cemal Reşit. Konsertant Parçalar-for cello and orchestra.
Wagner, Richard. Götterdämmerung.
In Turkish-language text:
Beethoven, Ludwig van. Fa majör 8. Senfoni, op. 93.
Rey, Cemal Reşit. Konsertant Parçalar-çello ve orkestra için.
Wagner, Richard. Götterdämmerung.
13.2.5.7 Work of Art
If you are citing the reproduction of a work of art in a book, catalogue, or
other printed matter, along with information about the work, you must give the
bibliographical information for the source publication:
In English-language text:
Çallı, İbrahim. Magnolias. İstanbul Resim ve Heykel Müzesi, Istanbul. In Nurullah Berk
and Adnan Turani, Başlangıcından Bugüne Çağdaş Türk Resim Sanatı Tarihi.
Istanbul: Tiglat Yayınevi, 1989. Plate 158.
Renoir, Pierre-Auguste. Portrait of Claude Monet. Musée du Louvre, Paris. In Fezzi Hide,
Renoir. London: Thames and Hudson, 1968. Plate 13.
In Turkish-language text:
Çallı, İbrahim. Manolyalar. İstanbul Resim ve Heykel Müzesi, İstanbul. Nurullah Berk ve
Adnan Turani, Başlangıcından Bugüne Çağdaş Türk Resim Sanatı Tarihi içinde.
İstanbul: Tiglat Yayınevi, 1989. Resim 158.
Renoir, Pierre-Auguste. Claude Monet Portresi. Musée du Louvre, Paris. Fezzi Hide,
Renoir içinde. Londra: Thames and Hudson, 1968. Resim 13.
If you cite the original work, give the artist, title, and location of the work of
art. In the case of a work that is not on permanent display or is curated in an
archive, as in the Dürer exmple below, the archival information too must be
indicated:
93
In English-language text:
Dürer, Albrecht. Self-Portrait of 1484. Bibliothek Albertina, Vienna. Drawing L. 488
(996).
Mantegna, Andrea. Madonna of the Quarries. Galleria degli Uffizi, Florence.
In Turkish-language text:
Dürer, Albrecht. 1484 Otoportresi. Bibliothek Albertina, Viyana. Desen L. 488 (996).
Mantegna, Andrea. Kayaların Meryemi. Galleria degli Uffizi, Floransa.
13.2.5.8 Advertisement
State the name of the product, company, or institution that is the subject of the
advertisement, followed by the designation ‘Advertisement’. In Turkish, for the
designation ‘Advertisement’, use ‘Reklâm’ if the advertisement is in the visual
domain, ‘İlân’ if it is in the domain of print. Do not underline, italicise, or place the
designation in quotation marks. Conclude with the publication information in the
usual form. For advertisements in the visual domain, ‘publication information’
indicates the venue at which the advertisement was viewed and date viewed. For
example, if you are citing a televised advertisement, this implies the television
channel where the advertisement was seen and date of viewing.
In English-language text:
Arçelik. Advertisement. Kanal D. 15 August 2001.
Garanti Bank. Advertisement. Milliyet 15 August 2001.
Lufthansa. Advertisement. Time 20 November 2000. 151.
“On İki Dev Adam.” Advertisement. European Basketball Cup, Istanbul, August 2001.
CNN Türk. 14 August 2001.
In Turkish-language text:
Arçelik. Reklâm. Kanal D. 15 Ağustos 2001.
Garanti Bankası. İlân. Milliyet 15 Ağustos 2001.
Lufthansa. İlân. Time 20 Kasım 2000. 151.
“On İki Dev Adam.” Reklâm. Avrupa Basketbol Şampiyonası, İstanbul, Ağustos 2001.
CNN Türk. 14 Ağustos 2001.
94
13.2.6 Other Printed Sources
13.2.6.1 Published Letter
In English-language text:
Bottomley, Edwin. “To Father.” 6 December 1843. An English Settler in Pioneer
Wisconsin: The Letters of Edwin Bottomley. Ed. Milo M. Quaife. Madison: State
Historical Society, 1918. 60-62.
Erhat, Azra. “Azra’dan Balıkçıya.” 30 December 1957. Mektuplarıyla Halikarnas
Balıkçısı. Istanbul: Adam Yayınları, 1979. 93-95.
In Turkish-language text:
Bottomley, Edwin. “To Father.” 6 Aralık 1843. An English Settler in Pioneer Wisconsin:
The Letters of Edwin Bottomley. Yay. Haz. Milo M. Quaife. Madison: State
Historical Society, 1918. 60-62.
Erhat, Azra. “Azra’dan Balıkçıya.” 30 Aralık 1957. Mektuplarıyla Halikarnas Balıkçısı.
İstanbul: Adam Yayınları, 1979. 93-95.
If a collection of letters does not give titles to the letters, but assigns numbers
to them, indicate the number of the letter, without enclosing it in quotation marks:
In English-language text:
Tanpınar, Ahmet Hamdi. Letter No. 56. 23 September 1960. Tanpınar’ın Mektupları. Ed.
Zeynep Kerman. Istanbul: Dergâh Yayınları, 1974; 1992. 167-68.
In Turkish-language text:
Tanpınar, Ahmet Hamdi. Mektup Nr. 56. 23 Eylül 1960. Tanpınar’ın Mektupları. Yay.
Haz. Zeynep Kerman. İstanbul: Dergâh Yayınları, 1974; 1992. 167-68.
13.2.6.2 Government Publication
In English-language text:
Devlet Planlama Teşkilatı. Nitelikli İnsangücü, Meslek Standartları Düzeni ve Sosyal
Sermaye Birikimi Özel İhtisas Komisyonu. Sekizinci Beş Yıllık Kalkınma Planı
Nitelikli İnsangücü, Meslek Standartları Düzeni ve Sosyal Sermaye Birikimi Özel
İhtisas Komisyonu Raporu. Ed. State Planning Organisation. Ankara: Devlet
Planlama Teşkilatı, 2001.
United States Department of Health and Human Services. Healthy People 2010:
Understanding and Improving Health. Washington, DC: Government Publication
Office, 2000.
In Turkish-language text:
Devlet Planlama Teşkilatı. Nitelikli İnsangücü, Meslek Standartları Düzeni ve Sosyal
Sermaye Birikimi Özel İhtisas Komisyonu. Sekizinci Beş Yıllık Kalkınma Planı
Nitelikli İnsangücü, Meslek Standartları Düzeni ve Sosyal Sermaye Birikimi Özel
95
İhtisas Komisyonu Raporu. Yay. Haz. Devlet Planlama Teşkilatı. Ankara: Devley
Planlama Teşkilatı, 2001.
Amerika Birleşik Devletleri Sağlık ve İnsanî Hizmetler Bakanlığı. Healthy People 2010:
Understanding and Improving Health. Washington, DC: Government Publication
Office, 2000.
13.2.6.3 Pamphlet
In English-language text:
The New York Public Library, Center for the Humanities, General Research Division.
Christopher Colombus and Early European Exploration. Research Guide 27.
Bibliography. New York: The New York Public Library, n.d.
In Turkish-language text:
The New York Public Library, Center for the Humanities, General Research Division.
Christopher Colombus and Early European Exploration. Research Guide 27.
Bibliyografya. New York: The New York Public Library, yıl yok.
13.2.7 Unpublished Sources
This category includes unpublished personal interviews you, the author, have
conducted as a part of your research, unpublished letters which may or may not
include you as correspondent, unpublished public or academic lectures you have
heard, and class or seminar lectures you have attended, and dissertations.
Unpublished personal interviews and letters, of course, bear no title, and should be
appropriately described.
13.2.7.1 Unpublished Interview Conducted by the Author
In English-language text:
Odita, Odili Donald. Personal interview by Nadine S. Kibanda. New York, 26 October
1998.
In Turkish-language text:
Odita, Odili Donald. Nadine S. Kibanda’nın kişisel söyleşisi. New York, 26 Ekim 1998.
13.2.7.2 Unpublished Letter
In English-language text:
Swales, Peter. Unpublished letter to the author. New York, 7 April 1992.
---. Unpublished letter to Peter Gay. Dyfed, Wales, 6 April 1992.
96
In Turkish-language text:
Swales, Peter. Yazara yayımlanmamış mektup. New York, 7 Nisan 1992.
---. Peter Gay’e yayımlanmamış mektup. Dyfed, Wales, 6 Nisan 1992.
13.2.7.3 Unpublished Lectures
In English-language text:
Deniz Şengel, Istanbul Bilgi University, Department of Comparative Literature course,
“Painting and Poetry I” lecture notes, Fall 1999.
In Turkish-language text:
Deniz Şengel, İstanbul Bilgi Üniversitesi, Karşılaştırmalı Edebiyat Bölümü dersi, “Resim
ve Şiir I” ders notları, Güz 1999.
13.2.7.4 Dissertations
Designate the degree for which the dissertation was written:
In English-language text:
Esplin, Ross Stolworthy. “The Emerging Legend of Sir Philip Sidney, 1582-1652.” Ph.D.
Diss., U of Utah, 1970.
Yavuz, N. Kıvılcım. “ ‘A souerayne chastyte’: Zenobia as Metaphor of the Educated
Woman in Pizan and Elyot, with Excursions into Boccaccio, Chaucer,
Erasmus.” B.A. Diss., İstanbul Bilgi U, 2001.
In Turkish-language text:
Esplin, Ross Stolworthy. “The Emerging Legend of Sir Philip Sidney, 1582-1652.”
Doktora Tezi, Utah Üniv., 1970.
Yavuz, N. Kıvılcım. “ ‘A souerayne chastyte’: Zenobia as Metaphor of the Educated
Woman in Pizan and Elyot, with Excursions into Boccaccio, Chaucer,
Erasmus.” Lisans Tezi, İstanbul Bilgi Üniv., 2001.
13.2.8 Title Within a Title
If the title of the journal article includes a quotation, enclose the quotation
in single quotation marks. Leave a blank space between the double and single
quotation marks if these are adjacent.
Book titles included in the title of a journal article are italicised or underlined
as titles of books would be in any context:
Azevedo, Milton M. “Shadows of a Literary Dialect: For Whom the Bell Tolls in Five
Romance Languages.” Hemingway Review 20: 1 (2000): 30-48.
97
Boutcher, Warren. “ ‘Who taught thee rhetoricke to deceive a maid?’: Christopher
Marlowe’s Hero and Leander, Juan Boscan’s Leandro, and Renaissance
Vernacular Humanism.” Comparative Literature 52: 1 (Winter 2000): 11-52.
Momma, Haruko. “A Man on the Cusp: Sir William Jones’s ‘Philology’ and ‘Oriental
Studies’.” Texas Studies in Literature and Language 41: 2 (Summer 1999):
160-80.
Since titles of dissertations are enclosed in double quotation marks rather than
being italicised or underlined, the same rule as for quotations within article titles
hold for dissertation titles:
Yavuz, N. Kıvılcım. “ ‘A souerayne chastyte’: Zenobia as Metaphor of the
Educated Woman in Pizan and Elyot, with Excursions into Boccaccio,
Chaucer, Erasmus.” B.A. Diss., İstanbul Bilgi U, 2001.
Titles within book titles are placed in single quotation marks. The entire title is
italicised or underlined:
Eco, Umberto. Postscript to ‘The Name of the Rose’. Trans. William Weaver.
San Diego, New York, and London: Harcourt Brace Jovanovich, 1984.
Quotations within book titles are enclosed in single quotation marks. As in the
quotation in the dissertation title above, where the quotation contains lower-case
initials, such are reproduced:
Wandel, Lee Palmer. ‘Voracious idols and violent hands’: Iconoclasm in Reformation
Zurich, Strasbourg, and Basel. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1995.
13.2.9 Manuscript Sources
Manuscripts from archives and library collections are entered into the
bibliography by the name of the author, followed by the title. If the author’s name
is unknown, as with a regular printed source, the entry is listed by the title. Follow
the title by the date of the manuscript, if known, then the name of the manuscript
collection, the repository where the collection is housed, and the location of the
repository. Finally indicate the identification or repository code assigned to the
manuscript by the holding institution. In non-Turkish archives, this code frequently
contains the designation MS. or ms., which stands for manuscript, or MSS. or
mss., which stands for manuscripts. Turkish archives will use various sigla to
indicate a manuscript, such as the TY in the example below, which stands for
98
Türkçe Yazma. You are likely to use numerous abbreviations when providing
information about manuscript sources. Explain these in a List of Abbreviations (see
Section 7.1.8 above). Do not translate abbreviations in library codes assigned to
manuscripts.
In many older manuscripts, a title is lacking. In that case, use the title
traditionally assigned to that work among scholars, or assigned to it in the library’s
catalogue. If this information is important to your study, you may indicate in
brackets that a title is wanting in the original. In this case, the designations ‘title
wanting’ or ‘untitled’ may be used.
In English-language text:
Salutati, Coluccio. De fato et fortuna. Biblioteca apostolica Vaticano, The Vatican. Vat.
Lat. 2928, Tr. III, 1, fols. 37-40.
Sidney, Philip. The Old Arcadia [title wanting]. Jesus College, Oxford. MS. 150.
Süleyman Faik Efendi. Kalem Nizâmı. Istanbul University Library, Istanbul. TY No. 3634.
In Turkish-language text:
Salutati, Coluccio. De fato et fortuna. Biblioteca apostolica Vaticano, Vatikan. Vat.
Lat. 2928, Tr. III, 1, fol. 37-40.
Sidney, Philip. The Old Arcadia [başlık yok]. Jesus College, Oxford. MS. 150.
Süleyman Faik Efendi. Kalem Nizâmı. İstanbul Üniversitesi Kütüphanesi, İstanbul. TY No.
3634.
Owing to their character, manuscripted materials in public archives generally
lack a proper title. They are catalogued by a name-code designating the public
office that issued the document, and a number. For example, the following entry is
to a source with the Turkish Prime Ministry’s Ottoman Archive and is designated
by the specific collection in which it is found and the number assigned to it by the
cataloguer:
Başbakanlık Osmanlı Arşivi, Hatt-ı Hümâyûn, no. 4149.
99
If you provide a List of Abbreviations, the above source may be indicated in your
bibliography also in the following fashion:
Başbakanlık Osmanlı Arşivi (Ankara), HH no. 4149.
If more than one document in the same collection were used, these would be
entered in the alphabetical list in the order of number. The entire entry would go
under B, by the initial letter of the name of the archive.
In English-language text, you may provide the translation of the archive’s
name in brackets if you think this should be of help to your reader:
Başbakanlık Osmanlı Arşivi [Ottoman Archive at the Prime Ministry] (Ankara),
HH no. 4149.
13.3
Footnotes and Endnotes
Notes may be in the form of footnotes or endnotes. Footnotes are placed at the
bottom of the page. Endnotes are placed either at the end of each chapter or at the
end of the dissertation or paper, before the Bibliography or Works Cited list. If
your text has Appendices, the gathered endnotes come after these. Foot- or endnote
numbers inserted into the text must be 9 point Times New Roman ‘normal’
superscript type. Numbers must be in Arabic numerals. In very rare cases may you
use super-scripted lower-case letters or asterisks instead of Arabic numerals. Do
not use asterisks or lower-case letters for indicating foot- or endnotes without
consulting with your dissertation supervisor. In rare cases, you may use footnotes
and endnotes in a paper or dissertation. One example of this is a translation where
the original has numerous, say, footnotes. In this case, the translator’s notes, if any,
may be placed at the end. Do not decide to use both notations without consulting
with your dissertation supervisor.
Number notes consecutively throughout a paper. Depending on the number of
notes, you may be able to do so in a dissertation, too. Else, numbering of notes
starts from 1 in each chapter. Consult with your dissertation supervisor.
Footnotes as well as endnotes are single-spaced. Skip one single space between
footnotes if there are multiple ones on a page (i.e., skip a line between the last line
of a footnote and the first line of the subsequent footnote). Similarly skip one single
space between endnotes.
100
In the case of footnotes, indent the footnote number (and thereby the first line
of a footnote) by the same number of spaces as you indent the initial line of your
paragraphs (i.e., five spaces). Leave one space after the footnote number and then
start typing your footnote text. Footnotes must be separated from the main body of
text by a complete horizontal line or a segment of a line one space above the first
line of footnote. Unless you use older or corrupt software, the default settings of
your wordprocessing software will introduce this line and the appropriate footnote
spacing and type point size. Whichever form you choose (complete line or segment
of line), it must be consistent throughout the paper or dissertation. The following is
an example of multiple footnotes on a page:
______________________________
1
Emilie Amt, Women’s Lives in Medieval Europe: A Sourcebook (New York:
Routledge, 1993), p. 23.
2
Derek Baker, Medieval Women (Oxford: Basil Blackwell, 1978), pp. 78-82.
3
Marc Bloch, Feudal Society, trans. L. A. Manyon, (Chicago: University of Chicago
Press, 1961), I: 112-13.
In endnotes, type the note number slightly above the line; you may use
superscript but keep the size at 12 points. Leave one space and enter the endnote
text.
If you list endnotes at the end of each chapter, the heading Notes to Chapter
X (X being the number of the chapter the notes are for) appears at the left margin
on the first line of a new page. A colon follows the heading. Both heading and
colon are in 12 point Times New Roman ‘normal’ type. Do not use ‘bold’, ‘italics’,
or underline this heading. Skip one single space after the heading, before typing
your first endnote. Endnotes are numbered not in small superscript, but in 12 point
Times New Roman ‘normal’ type, followed by a period and one space before you
enter the note.
Endnotes that follow each chapter are not listed in the Table of the Contents.
If you are using endnotes in a paper, which has no chapter divisions, notes
should be typed on a new page. The standard heading Notes appears on the first
line of the page, centred between the text margins without punctuation.
101
The same rules as for notes at the end of individual chapters are applied to
endnotes gathered at the end of the dissertation. The difference is in the
composition of headings. The heading Notes appears in 12 point Times New
Roman at the left margin on the first line of the page. Skip two single spaces after
this main heading before typing in the first subheading. Subheadings are Notes to
the Introduction, Notes to Chapter 1, Notes to Chapter 2, and so on. Section
subheadings need not be included, but may if you have a very large number of
endnotes. Each subheading is followed by a colon, also in 12-point bold. Do not
skip a space after a subheading in the Notes section. You may choose to enter the
title of the chapter after the colon in the heading. In that case, there is no need to
follow the full title by a colon. If the full title is longer than one line of text, singlespace the title.
If you gather endnotes at the end of the dissertation, the heading Notes must be
entered in the Table of the Contents, following the Conclusion or Summary, and
following the Appendices, if any.
Place numbers at points in the text that maintain the text’s coherence
(preferably, at the end of a sentence). Do not leave space between the note number
and the letter or punctuation mark that immediately precedes it. Leave one space
after the number before you begin to type another word.
In the humanities, the first endnote or footnote to a work contains the full
publication information found in the bibliographic entry, as well as the page
reference identifying the portion of the source you are referring to at that point in
your text. Second and later references to a particular work contain less information,
consisting of author’s last name, short title of work, and number(s) of the page(s) to
which you are referring.
If you refer to a single page of a work, designate ‘page’ by p. in English, and s.
in Turkish: p. 31; s. 17. If your reference is to more than one page, designate
‘pages’ by pp. in English, and ss. in Turkish: pp. 23-27; ss. 98-100.
The two page numbers connected by a hyphen in a multi-page reference (pp.
54-55, pp. 37-49) indicate that you are referring to the entire segment between the
indicated pages, including the two pages whose numbers are given.
102
Express page numbers above 100 efficiently: if your reference spans pages in
the hundreds, omit the hundreds digit (yüzler hanesi) of the ending page. For
example, ‘pp. 212-17’ means pages from 212 through 217. Include the hundreds
digit only if the tens (onlar hanesi) in the closing page number has zero. Thus: pp.
105-107; pp. 301-309; but 209-11.
Since the first note to a work contains complete publication information, you
may not need to compile a Bibliography for a paper. Check with your instructor.
For a dissertation, you must compile a Bibliography or a Works Cited list.
Few explanations accompany the examples given below. However, examples
used are those given in Section 13.2, describing the form for entries in the
Bibliography and Works Cited list, and they more or less follow the order of the
presentation in Section 13.2. This should enable the reader to trace the specific kind
of publication whose note-entry form is being illustrated.
13.3.1 Form for Citing a Book
A bibliographic entry has three parts, each followed by a period: the author’s
name reversed, the title, and the publication information (place of publication,
publisher, year of publication). A documentation note has the same divisions, with
the addition of a page reference. Its punctuation too, differs from the punctuation of
the bibliographic entry. The author’s name is written in normal order, followed by
a comma. Then comes the title, and the publication information in parentheses,
followed by a comma and the page reference. The only places where a period is
used is after the abbreviation for ‘page’ (p., pp., s., ss.) and at the end. Notice in the
examples below, place where space has been left following punctuation.
In English-language text:
1
Erik J. Zürcher, Turkey: A Modern History (London and New York: I. B. Tauris,
1992), p. 86.
2
Feroz Ahmad, The Making of Modern Turkey (London and New York:
Routledge, 1993), p. 143.
In Turkish-language text:
1
Erik J. Zürcher, Turkey: A Modern History (Londra ve New York: I. B. Tauris,
1992), s. 86.
103
2
Feroz Ahmad, The Making of Modern Turkey (Londra ve New York: Routledge,
1993), s. 143.
In English-language text:
5
Stanford J. Shaw, History of the Ottoman Empire and Modern Turkey. I: Empire
of the Gazis & the Rise and Decline of the Ottoman Empire (1280-1808) (Cambridge:
Cambridge University Press, 1976), pp. 276-77.
Stanford J. Shaw and Ezel Kural Shaw, History of the Ottoman Empire and
Modern Turkey. II: Reform, Revolution and Republic & the Rise of Modern Turkey (18081975) (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1976), p. 67.
6
7
Mete Tunçay and Erik J. Zürcher, Socialism and Nationalism in the Ottoman
Empire (1876-1923) (London and New York: British Academy Press; Amsterdam: The
International Society of Social History, 1994), p. 118.
In Turkish-language text:
5
Stanford J. Shaw, History of the Ottoman Empire and Modern Turkey. I: Empire
of the Gazis & the Rise and Decline of the Ottoman Empire (1280-1808) (Cambridge:
Cambridge University Press, 1976), ss. 276-77.
6
Stanford J. Shaw and Ezel Kural Shaw, History of the Ottoman Empire and
Modern Turkey. II: Reform, Revolution and Republic & the Rise of Modern Turkey (18081975) (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1976), s. 67.
7
Mete Tunçay ve Erik J. Zürcher, Socialism and Nationalism in the Ottoman
Empire (1876-1923) (Londra ve New York: British Academy Press; Amsterdam: The
International Society of Social History, 1994), s. 118.
The examples above are the form for the first reference to a book in a
documentary note. Consequent references use the abbreviated form of author’s last
name and, if possible, shortened title, followed by the page reference.
In English-language text:
a.
2
Halil İnalcık, The Ottoman Empire: The Classical Age 1300-1600 (London:
Designs and Patents Act, 1988), p. 97.
17
b.
İnalcık, The Ottoman Empire, p. 99.
4
Ferdinand de Saussure, Genel Dilbilim Dersleri, ed. Charles Bally and Albert
Sechehaye, trans. Berke Vardar (Ankara: Birey ve Toplum Yayınları, 1985), pp. 108109.
21
Saussure, Genel Dilbilim Dersleri, p. 38.
104
c.
3
Jacques Merlau-Ponty and Bruno Morando, The Rebirth of Cosmology, trans.
Helen Weaver (New York: Alfred A. Knopf, 1976), p. 89.
6
Merlau-Ponty and Morando, Rebirth of Cosmology, pp. 89-91.
In Turkish-language text:
a.
2
Halil İnalcık, The Ottoman Empire: The Classical Age 1300-1600 (Londra:
Designs and Patents Act, 1988), s. 97.
17
b.
4
Ferdinand de Saussure, Genel Dilbilim Dersleri, yay. haz. Charles Bally ve
Albert Sechehaye, çev. Berke Vardar (Ankara: Birey ve Toplum Yayınları, 1985), ss.
108-109.
21
c.
İnalcık, The Ottoman Empire, s. 99.
Saussure, Genel Dilbilim Dersleri, s. 38.
3
Jacques Merlau-Ponty ve Bruno Morando, The Rebirth of Cosmology, çev.
Helen Weaver (New York: Alfred A. Knopf, 1976), s. 89.
6
Merlau-Ponty ve Morando, Rebirth of Cosmology, ss. 89-91.
13.3.2
Form for Citing a Part of a Book
In English-language text:
9
Oğuz Arsal, “Türk Toplumu ve Resim,” Modern Osmanlı Resminin Sosyolojisi
(1839-1924), trans. Tuncay Birkan (Istanbul: Yapı Kredi Yayınları, 2000), pp. 27-89.
12
Arsal, “Türk Toplumu ve Resim,” pp. 29-31.
13
Thomas S. Kuhn, “Copernicus’ Innovation,” The Copernican Revolution.
Planetary Astronomy in the Development of Western Thought (1957; New York: MJF
Books, 1985), pp. 134-36.
14
Kuhn, “Copernicus’ Innovation,” p. 181.
17
Walter Benjamin, “The Task of the Translator,” in Theories of Translation. An
Anthology of Essays from Dryden to Derrida, ed. Rainer Schulte and John Biguenet
(Chicago and London: University of Chicago Press, 1992), p. 72.
18
Benjamin, “The Task of the Translator,” p. 74.
In Turkish-language text:
9
Oğuz Arsal, “Türk Toplumu ve Resim,” Modern Osmanlı Resminin Sosyolojisi
(1839-1924), çev. Tuncay Birkan (İstanbul: Yapı Kredi Yayınları, 2000), ss. 27-89.
12
Arsal, “Türk Toplumu ve Resim,” ss. 29-31.
105
13
Thomas S. Kuhn, “Copernicus’ Innovation,” The Copernican Revolution.
Planetary Astronomy in the Development of Western Thought (1957; New York: MJF
Books, 1985), ss. 134-36.
14
Kuhn, “Copernicus’ Innovation,” s. 181.
17
Walter Benjamin, “The Task of the Translator”: Theories of Translation. An
Anthology of Essays from Dryden to Derrida içinde, yay. haz. Rainer Schulte ve John
Biguenet (Chicago ve Londra: University of Chicago Press, 1992), s. 72.
18
Benjamin, “The Task of the Translator,” s. 74.
13.3.3
Form for Citing a Periodical Publication
The differences between the bibliographic and note forms for the entry of an
article are that the author’s name is written in normal order, the periods following
the author’s name and the title of the text are replaced by commas, and the page
numbers, which in the bibliographic entry had specified the range of the article,
now indicate the place of the reference. As in the form for citing a book, in further
citations of a source, abbreviated information is given.
In English-language text:
1
Esra Çaylan, “A Europe for All,” Perceptions 5: 2 (June-August 2000): 34.
2
Orhan Şaik Gökyay, “Divan Edebiyatında Çiçekler III,” Tarih ve Toplum 14: 79
(1990): 19-20.
3
Gage McWeeny, “The Primal Seen: Captain Cook and Cannibal Visions at
Hawaii,” Critical Matrix 11 (1997): 160.
4
Çaylan, “A Europe for All,” pp. 36-42.
5
Gökyay, “Divan Edebiyatında Çiçekler III,” p. 22.
6
McWeeny, “The Primal Seen ,” p. 171.
In Turkish-language text:
1
Esra Çaylan, “A Europe for All,” Perceptions 5: 2 (Haziran-Ağustos 2000): 34.
2
Orhan Şaik Gökyay, “Divan Edebiyatında Çiçekler III,” Tarih ve Toplum 14: 79
(1990): 19-20.
3
Gage McWeeny, “The Primal Seen: Captain Cook and Cannibal Visions at
Hawaii,” Critical Matrix 11 (1997): 160.
4
Çaylan, “A Europe for All,” ss. 36-42.
106
5
Gökyay, “Divan Edebiyatında Çiçekler III,” s. 22.
6
McWeeny, “The Primal Seen ,” s. 171.
13.3.4
Form for Citing an Electronic Source
The differences between the bibliographic and note forms for the entry of an
electronic source are that the author’s name is written in normal order, the periods
following the author’s name and the title of the text are replaced by commas, and
the page or paragraph numbers, which in the bibliographic entry had specified the
range of the article, now indicate the place of the reference. As in the form for
citing a book, in further citations of an electronic source, abbreviated information is
given. Where no page or paragraph numbers are indicated, none is given.
In English-language text:
1
Kenneth Inada, “A Buddhist Response to the Nature of Human Rights,” Journal
of Buddhist Ethics 2 (1995): pars. 2-3, 29 August 2000, http://jbe.la.psu.edu/2/
inada1.html.
2
Inada, “A Buddhist Response,” par. 7.
3
Helen Johnson, “Spice Girls?” Feminista 2: 11 (March-April 1999): 30 August
2000, http://www.feminista.com/v2n11/johnson.html.
4
Johnson, “Spice Girls?”
5
Oğuz Esen, “Financial Openness in Turkey,” International Review of Applied
Economics 14: 1 (January 2000): 5, Master FILE Premier, 30 August 2000, http://
ehostvgw5.epnet.com/ehost1.asp?key=204.179.122.141_ 8000_-2011029098&return=
n&site=ehost.
6
Esen, “Financial Openness in Turkey,” p. 19.
7
Bill Daly, Writing Argumentative Essays, 1997, 26 June 1998, http://www.
eslplanet.com/teachertools/argueweb/frntpage.htm.
8
Daly, Writing Argumentative Essays.
9
Jeffrey K. Clark, “Complications in Academia: Sexual Harassment and the Law,”
Siecus Report 21:6 (1993): 8, CD-ROM, 1994 SIRS, SIRS 1993 School, volume 4, article
93A.
10
Clark, “Complications in Academia,” p. 8.
107
11
Martin Tilton, “Re: Meeting Agenda for Friday,” e-mail to Norit Berman, 18
June 1999.
12
Tilton, “Meeting Agenda for Friday.”
13
William M. Mande, “Critique of Capitalism,” online posting, 23 August 2000,
The Golem, 31 August 2000, http://pnews.org/boards/capitalism/messages/46.html.
14
Mande, “Critique of Capitalism.”
In Turkish-language text:
1
Kenneth Inada, “A Buddhist Response to the Nature of Human Rights,” Journal
of Buddhist Ethics 2 (1995): para. 2-3, 29 Ağustos 2000, http://jbe.la.psu.edu/2/ inada1.
html.
2
Inada, “A Buddhist Response,” para. 7.
3
Helen Johnson, “Spice Girls?” Feminista 2: 11 (Mart-Nisan 1999): 30 Ağustos
2000, http://www.feminista.com/v2n11/johnson.html.
4
Johnson, “Spice Girls?”
5
Oğuz Esen, “Financial Openness in Turkey,” International Review of Applied
Economics 14: 1 (Ocak 2000): 5, Master FILE Premier, 30 Ağustos 2000, http://
ehostvgw5.epnet.com/ehost1.asp?key=204.179.122.141_ 8000_-2011029098&return=
n&site=ehost.
6
Esen, “Financial Openness in Turkey,” s. 19.
7
Bill Daly, Writing Argumentative Essays, 1997, 26 Haziran 1998, http://www.
eslplanet.com/teachertools/argueweb/frntpage.htm.
8
Daly, Writing Argumentative Essays.
9
Jeffrey K. Clark, “Complications in Academia: Sexual Harassment and the Law,”
Siecus Report 21:6 (1993): 8, CD-ROM, 1994 SIRS, SIRS 1993 School, sayı 4, makale
93A.
10
Clark, “Complications in Academia,” s. 8.
11
Martin Tilton, “Re: Meeting Agenda for Friday,” Norit Berman’a e-mektup, 18
Haziran 1999.
12
Tilton, “Meeting Agenda for Friday.”
13
William M. Mande, “Critique of Capitalism,” online ilan, 23 Ağustos 2000, The
Golem, 31 Ağustos 2000, http://pnews.org/boards/capitalism/messages/46.html.
14
Mande, “Critique of Capitalism.”
108
13.3.5
Form for Citing Media Other Than the Electronic
The form for citing media other than the the printed or the electronic differs
from the form for the bibliographic entry in that all periods except the final one are
replaced by commas or semicolons. This excludes periods used at the end of
abbreviated words. With the elimination of periods, some capital initials become
lower case. Where applicable, ‘author’ names are typed in normal order. Thus the
form for the first citation of such sources is as follows:
In English-language text:
1
“An Interview with Sadat,” 60 Minutes, CBS, WITI, Milwaukee, 11 November
2
“The Blessing Way,” The X-Files, Fox, WXIA, Atlanta, 19 July 1998.
3
“Prof. Dr. Aysel Çelikel ile Söyleşi,” 45 Dakika, Flaş TV, Istanbul, 5 July 1999.
4
Sertab Erener, Sertab, Sony Music, COL 4944712, 1999.
1979.
5
Woody Guthrie, Woody Guthrie Sings Folk Songs, with Leadbelly, Cisco
Houston, Sonny Terry, and Bess Hawes; intro. by Pete Seeger; Folkways Records, FA
2483, 1962.
6
Dünyayı Kurtaran Adam, dir. Çetin İnanç, perf. Cüneyt Arkın and Aytekin
Akkaya, Anıt Film, 1982.
7
Rebel without a Cause, dir. Nicholas Ray, perf. James Dean, Natalie Wood, Sal
Mineo, and Dennis Hopper, Warner, 1955.
8
Oryantal Show, videokaset, dansözler: Hazar, Ebru, Anıl, İstanbul: Dicle Film
Video, kod 1753, 1996.
9
Les Misérables, by Alain Boublil and Claude-Michel Schonberg, dir. Trevor Nunn
and John Caird; Broadway Theatre, New York, 5 April 1988; based on Victor Hugo’s Les
Misérables.
10
Ludwig van Beethoven, Symphony no. 8 in F, op. 93.
11
Pierre-Auguste Renoir, Portrait of Claude Monet, Musée du Louvre, Paris, in
Fezzi Hide, Renoir (London: Thames and Hudson, 1968), plate 13.
12
Andrea Mantegna, Madonna of the Quarries, Galleria degli Uffizi, Florence.
13
Arçelik, advertisement, Kanal D, 15 August 2001.
109
In Turkish-language text:
1
“An Interview with Sadat,” 60 Minutes, CBS, WITI, Milwaukee, 11 Kasım 1979.
2
“The Blessing Way,” The X-Files, Fox, WXIA, Atlanta, 19 Temmuz 1998.
3
“Prof. Dr. Aysel Çelikel ile Söyleşi,” 45 Dakika, Flaş TV, İstanbul, 5 Temmuz
4
Sertab Erener, Sertab, Sony Music, COL 4944712, 1999.
1999.
5
Woody Guthrie, Woody Guthrie Sings Folk Songs; Leadbelly, Cisco Houston,
Sonny Terry ve Bess Hawes ile; giriş: Pete Seeger; Folkways Records, FA 2483, 1962.
6
Dünyayı Kurtaran Adam, yön. Çetin İnanç, oynayanlar Cüneyt Arkın ve Aytekin
Akkaya, Anıt Film, 1982.
7
Rebel without a Cause, yön. Nicholas Ray, oynayanlar James Dean, Natalie Wood,
Sal Mineo, ve Dennis Hopper, Warner, 1955.
8
Oryantal Show, videokaset, dansözler: Hazar, Ebru, Anıl, İstanbul: Dicle Film
Video, kod 1753, 1996.
9
Les Misérables, yaz. Alain Boublil ve Claude-Michel Schonberg, yön. Trevor
Nunn ve John Caird; Broadway Theatre, New York, 5 Nisan 1988; Victor Hugo’nun Les
Misérables adlı romanından uyarlama
10
Ludwig van Beethoven, Fa majör 8. Senfoni, op. 93.
11
Pierre-Auguste Renoir, Claude Monet Portresi, Musée du Louvre, Paris: Fezzi
Hide, Renoir içinde (Londra: Thames and Hudson, 1968), resim 13.
12
13
Andrea Mantegna, Kayaların Meryemi, Galleria degli Uffizi, Floransa.
Arçelik, Reklâm, Kanal D, 15 Ağustos 2001.
No documentary notes after the first citation are needed for the above sources.
1
Stevens v. National Broadcasting Co. 148 USPQ 755. CA Super. Ct. 1966.
13.3.6 Form for Citing Unpublished Sources
The form for first citations varies from that for bibliographic entries, again, by
the typing of the author’s name in normal order, the replacement of periods by
commas except in abbreviated words, and use of lower case initials in common
110
names. No sunsequent reference notes are necessary except with dissertations. Page
numbers of the reference are added where applicable.
In English-language text:
1
Odili Donald Odita, personal interview by Nadine S. Kibanda, New York, 26
October 1998.
2
Peter Swales, unpublished letter to the author, New York, 7 April 1992.
3
Ross Stolworthy Esplin, “The Emerging Legend of Sir Philip Sidney, 1582-1652,”
Ph.D. Diss., U of Utah, 1970, p. 97.
4 Esplin, “The Emerging Legend of Sir Philip Sidney,” pp. 28-29.
In Turkish-language text:
1
Odili Donald Odita, Nadine S. Kibanda’nın kişisel söyleşisi, New York, 26
Ekim 1998.
2
Peter Swales, yazara yayımlanmamış mektup, New York, 7 Nisan 1992.
3
Ross Stolworthy Esplin, “The Emerging Legend of Sir Philip Sidney, 1582-1652,”
Doktora Tezi, Utah Üniv., 1970, s. 97.
4 Esplin, “The Emerging Legend of Sir Philip Sidney,” ss. 28-29.
13.3.7 Form for Citing Manuscript Sources
As with regular publications, give full information the first time you cite a
manuscript source, followed by abbreviated information thereafter. Since practices
of pagination vary among manuscript cultures, consult with your dissertation
supervisor or instructor regarding these.
In English-language text:
a.
1
Philip Sidney, The Old Arcadia [title wanting], Jesus College, Oxford, ms.
150, 6r.
7
b.
Sidney, The Old Arcadia, ms. 150, 6r.
2
Süleyman Faik Efendi, Kalem Nizâmı, Istanbul University Library, Istanbul,
TY no. 3634, n.p.
9
Süleyman Faik Efendi, Kalem Nizâmı, TY no. 3634, n.p.
111
In Turkish-language text:
a.
1
Philip Sidney, The Old Arcadia [başlık yok], Jesus College, Oxford, ms. 150,
6r.
7
b.
Sidney, The Old Arcadia, ms. 150, 6r.
2
Süleyman Faik Efendi, Kalem Nizâmı, İstanbul Üniversitesi Kütüphanesi,
İstanbul, TY no. 3634, s. no. yok.
9
Süleyman Faik Efendi, Kalem Nizâmı, s. no. yok.
14. İstanbul Bilgi University Style for the Sciences and Social Sciences
The sciences and social sciences employ techniques of citing, quoting, and
documenting that drastically differ from those in the humanities. Although there
are differences among disciplines in the sciences and social sciences too, a large
number of principles concerning in-text citations are nevertheless shared. The
differences in techniques of citation mainly concern punctuation. Thus in what
follows below, the principles of in-text citation are described jointly for all
disciplines in the sciences and social sciences, while specific examples are
provided according to discipline. For greater clarity, methods of preparing the list
of references are handled under separate headings, individually for each group of
disciplines. The three groups of disciplines at Bilgi, that subscribe to slightly
different documentation styles, are:
Psychology
Sociology
Economic and Administrative Sciences, Computer Science, and Mathematics
14.1 Citing In-Text
The sciences and social sciences follow the author-date method of citing
references within the text of a paper or dissertation. This means that the author’s
last name and the year of publication for the source should appear in the text, and a
complete reference should appear in the reference list. The simplest way of
handling a citation in these disciplines is to integrate the required information
112
(author and the year of publication) in your text. In the following example, both
elements were integrated into text:
In summer 2001, Solomon reported on the decision of the World Bank to cancel a
global meeting set for Barcelona, Spain, in June 2001, and to shift the meeting to the
Internet.
In the following, part of the citation information is indicated parenthetically:
Solomon (2001) reported on the decision of the World Bank to cancel a global
meeting set for Barcelona, Spain, in June 2001, and to shift the meeting to the
Internet.
In the following, the entire citation is indicated parenthetically. This is where
differences among disciplines come in:
Psychology separates name and year by a comma, leaving one space after the
comma:
In a recent article (Solomon, 2001), the World Bank was said to have cancelled a
global meeting set for Barcelona, Spain, in June 2001, and suggested shifting the
meeting to the Internet.
Sociology and Economic and Administrative Sciences, Computer Science,
and Mathematics omit the comma:
In a recent article (Solomon 2001), the World Bank was said to have cancelled a
global meeting set for Barcelona, Spain, in June 2001, and suggested shifting the
meeting to the Internet.
Other examples:
1.
In 1994, Silverstone studied the determining function of television in everyday life
and concluded that ...
Silverstone (1994) studied the determining function of television in everyday life and
concluded that ...
Psychology:
In a study of the determining function of television in everyday life (Silverstone,
1994), it was concluded that ...
Sociology and Economic and Administrative Sciences, Computer Science,
and Mathematics:
In a study of the determining function of television in everyday life (Silverstone
1994), it was concluded that ...
113
2.
The theory was first advanced by Gunter in 1998.
Gunter (1998) was the first to advance the theory.
The theory was first advanced by Gunter (1998).
The theory was first advanced in 1998 (Gunter).
Psychology:
When the theory was first advanced (Gunter, 1998), ...
Sociology and Economic and Administrative Sciences, Computer Science,
and Mathematics:
When the theory was first advanced (Gunter 1998), ...
When a work has no author or the author is anonymous, cite in-text an
abbreviated version (i.e., use the first few words) of the title as it appears on your
list of references:
When the title of the anonymous or unsigned work is given in-text, in
Sociology, the title of the article with no author is enclosed in double quotation
marks; in Psychology and Economic and Administrative Sciences, Computer
Science, and Mathematics, it is enclosed in single quotation marks:
Sociology:
“To Please IMF” (2001) claimed that the Banking Supervisory Board of Turkey had
taken control of several banks by mid-July.
‘To Please IMF’ (2001) claimed that the Banking Supervisory Board of Turkey had
taken control of several banks by mid-July.
The following is the form for indicating parenthetically a work with an
anonymous or unsigned author:
Psychology:
No quotation marks are used for articles, chapters and other parts of
publications when the title is indicated parenthetically.
The Banking Supervisory Board of Turkey had taken control of several banks by midJuly (To Please IMF, 2001).
Sociology:
114
Double quotation marks are used for articles, chapters and other parts of
publications when the title is indicated parenthetically.
The Banking Supervisory Board of Turkey had taken control of several banks by midJuly (“To Please IMF” 2001).
Economic and Administrative Sciences, Computer Science, and
Mathematics:
Single quotation marks are used for articles, chapters and other parts of
publications when the title is indicated parenthetically.
The Banking Supervisory Board of Turkey had taken control of several banks by midJuly (‘To Please IMF’ 2001).
If the publication year is not indicated in the source, use n.d. (‘no date’)
without leaving a space after the first period:
Jones (n.d.) argued that ...
When you are writing in Turkish, use yıl yok:
Jones (yıl yok) ise bu tezi yadsıyordu.
For institutional or corporate authorship, supply minimum identification from
the beginning of the complete citation:
Psychology:
(U.S. Bureau of Census, 1963)
(T.C. Maliye Bakanlığı, 1977)
Sociology and Economic and Administrative Sciences, Computer Science,
and Mathematics:
(U.S. Bureau of Census 1963)
(T.C. Maliye Bakanlığı 1977)
When a work by two or three authors is cited in-text in parentheses, the
reference should be as in the following:
Psychology:
(Verheul & Rowson, 2001)
(Larsen, Green & Withers, 1987)
Sociology:
(Verheul and Rowson 2001)
115
(Larsen, Green, and Withers 1987)
Economic and Administrative Sciences, Computer Science, and
Mathematics:
(Verheul & Rowson 2001)
(Larsen, Green & Withers 1987)
In Sociology, for three authors, give all the last names in the first citation in the
text as in the above example; in subsequent citations use the first author’s name
and et al. (meaning ‘and others’ in Latin):
(Larsen et al. 1987).
When you are writing in Turkish, use vd. (‘ve diğerleri’):
(Larsen vd. 1987).
Writers in Psychology and Economic and Administrative Sciences, Computer
Science, and Mathematics may use this technique if they wish, provided that they
do so consistently. Sociology writers must employ the technique.
As in the above examples, in Psychology and Economic and Administrative
Sciences, Computer Science, and Mathematics parenthetical citations use the
ampersand (&). However, when the authors’ names are incorporated in the text, the
ampersand is replaced by the word ‘and’, if you are writing in Turkish, by ‘ve’:
Verheul and Rowson (2001) discussed the use of poverty reduction strategy papers.
Larsen, Green and Withers (1987) discussed ...
For a work by more than three authors, only the surname of the first listed
author is used, followed by the term et al. (‘and others’ in Latin). For example, in
all disciplines of the social sciences, a work by Kennedy, Evans, Kruger, Mayberg,
Meyer, McCann, Arifuzzman, Honle, and Vacarino is cited as in the following:
Kennedy et al. (2001) succeeded measuring the changes in regional brain glucose
metabolism after paroxetine treatment.
Or, for complete parenthetical citation:
Psychology:
Changes in regional brain glucose metabolism after paroxetine treatment proved
measurable (Kennedy et al., 2001).
116
Sociology and Economic and Administrative Sciences, Computer Science,
and Mathematics:
Changes in regional brain glucose metabolism after paroxetine treatment
proved measurable (Kennedy et al. 2001).
When two or more authors you are citing have the same last name, use first
name initial (or first and middle name initials) as well:
Psychology:
Although some medical ethicists claim that cloning will lead to designer children (R.
Miller, 1997), others note that the advantages for medical research outweigh the
ethical consideration (A. Miller, 1998).
Sociology and Economic and Administrative Sciences, Computer Science,
and Mathematics:
Although some medical ethicists claim that cloning will lead to designer children (R.
Miller 1997), others note that the advantages for medical research outweigh the
ethical consideration (A. Miller 1998).
Separate a series of references with a semicolon and alphabetise by the first
author’s name in each entry:
Psychology:
(Burgess, 1968; Marwell et al., 1971)
Sociology and Economic and Administrative Sciences, Computer Science,
and Mathematics:
(Burgess 1968; Marwell et al. 1971)
In Psychology, there are a number of additional rules relevant to citations from
translations or re-published works, and for citing sources about which you have
read in another secondary source. For example, when you cite Freud’s essay “The
Ego and the Id” (which was first published in original German in 1923),
from James Strachey’s translation published in 1961, your in-text citation reads as
in the following:
(Freud, 1923/1961)
117
If you quote, for example, a passage from a 1972 article by Spielberger, which
you have come across in a 1989 work by Stephan and Stephan, your in-text
documentation would be as in the following:
(Spielberger, 1972, qtd. in Stephan & Stephan, 1989, p. 203)
If you cite the 1972 article by Spielberger without quoting, and you have read
about Spielberger’s article in the 1989 work by Stephan and Stephan, your in-text
citation would be as in the following:
(Spielberger, 1972, cited in Stephan & Stephan, 1989, p. 203)
Citations of electronic sources in all the disciplines of the sciences and the
social sciences follow the form of citations from printed sources, indicating
author’s last name and year of publication, with the full bibliography given in the
list of references.
To cite a Web page within the text of a paper or dissertation, give full address
of the site in parentheses: (http://www, etc.). An entry is still required in the list of
references.
14.2 Short Quotations
In the social sciences, short quotations are defined as those that are fewer than
40 words. To indicate short quotations in your text, enclose the quoted passage
within double quotation marks. Provide author, year, and specific page citation in
the text. All periods, commas, semicolons appear after the parenthetical citation.
Question marks and exclamation points should appear within the quotation marks if
they are part of the quotation, but after the parenthetical citation if they are part of
your text.
Psychology:
She stated that, as a result, “the placebo effect disappeared” (Miele, 1993, p. 276).
According to Miele (1993), “the placebo effect disappeared” as a result (p. 276).
Use pp., if your quotation spans more than one page: pp. 276-77. When you
are writing in Turkish, use s. for p., a single-page quotation, and ss. (pp.) for a
quotation spanning more than one page: s. 21; ss. 339-40.
118
Sociology and Economic and Administrative Sciences, Computer Science,
and Mathematics:
She stated that, as a result, “the placebo effect disappeared” (Miele 1993: 276).
According to Miele (1993), “the placebo effect disappeared” as a result (276).
Sometimes you may have to use an indirect quotation, that is, a quotation that
you found in another source that was quoting from the original. For such indirect
quotations, use qtd. in to indicate the source:
Psychology:
The 1982 Constitution implied that the ideology it propounded were “the historical
and moral values of Turkishness.” (qtd. in Parla, 1991, p. 22).
Sociology and Economic and Administrative Sciences, Computer Science,
and Mathematics:
The 1982 Constitution implied that the ideology it propounded were “the historical
and moral values of Turkishness.” (qtd. in Parla 1991: 22).
Enter both worksthe original source as well as the source where you found
the quotationin the list of citations.
14.3 Long Quotations
Place quotations longer than 40 words in a free-standing block of typewritten
lines, and omit quotation marks. Start the quotation on a new line indented five
spaces from the left margin. Type the entire quotation on the new margin. Indent
the first line of any new paragraph that begins within the quotation five spaces
from the new margin. Maintain the same line spacing as in the body of your text
(i.e., double- or one-and-a-half spacing). The parenthetical citation should come
after the period ending the quotation. As in the example below, quotations within
quotations are indicated by single quotation marks.
Psychology:
On the other hand, Cecile G. Helman’s 1978 study had found the following:
119
Contrary to its original intention, the National Health Service in
Britain may have reinforced the ‘folk healer’ aspect of its General
Practitioners; a much wider range of life experience and misfortune is
now being dealt with by GPsnot only a wider range of illness and
disease than formerly, but also psychological crises, life crises (such as
bereavement, divorce, etc.), and all the normal biological landmarks,
such as birth, childhood, puberty, menopause, and death. (p. 133)
Sociology and Economic and Administrative Sciences, Computer Science,
and Mathematics:
On the other hand, Cecile G. Helman’s 1978 study had found the following:
Contrary to its original intention, the National Health Service in
Britain may have reinforced the ‘folk healer’ aspect of its General
Practitioners; a much wider range of life experience and misfortune is
now being dealt with by GPsnot only a wider range of illness and
disease than formerly, but also psychological crises, life crises (such as
bereavement, divorce, etc.), and all the normal biological landmarks,
such as birth, childhood, puberty, menopause, and death. (133)
14.4 Notes
Try to avoid notes. Use them for evaluative bibliographic comments such as
when citing materials of limited availability or of debated nature, and for adding
information presented in a table, etc. You may occasionally use a note for brief
additional information that would seem digressive if included in the main text.
Examples:
1
See Brannon (1997), especially the famous chapters three and four, for analysis of
this trend.
2
On this problem see Miele (1993); for a contrasting view, see Pyle (1995).
Notes should be numbered consecutively throughout the text in superscript
Arabic numerals. The notes themselves are listed at the end of the paper or
dissertation in a separate section, starting on a new page. They follow the normal
spacing of the text and appear in paragraph format (a new paragraph for each note,
with the first line indented as in the two examples above). For page formatting and
title, see Section 9 above.
14.5 The List of References
120
The list of references provides information necessary for a reader to locate and
retrieve any source cited in your text. Each source you cite in your paper or
dissertation must appear in your list of references. Similarly, every entry in the list
of references must be cited in your text.
Basic rules for the social sciences:
1. Authors’ names are inverted (last name first).
2. In Psychology and Economic and Administrative Sciences, Computer
Science, and Mathematics, give last name and initials for all authors of a
particular work. In Sociology, write out the first name or names as well.
3. Alphabetise the list by authors’ last names. In the case of multiple authors to a
work, the publication’s place in the alphabetical order is determined by the first
author’s name.
4. If you have more than one work by an author, order them by publication date,
oldest to newest (the older publication date by that author appears on the list
before the newer one). When an author appears as the sole author of one work
and as the first author of a group of authors of another work, list the one-author
entries first. If more than one item by the same author was published in the
same year, list these in chronological order as well (such are also assigned
letter-signals, which will be explained below). If no author is given for a
particular source, alphabetise the item by its title and use a shortened version of
the title in parenthetical citations.
5. Except in Sociology, use ampersand (&) instead of ‘and’ when listing multiple
authors of a single work. In Sociology, use ‘and’.
6. The spacing of the list of references should cohere with the rest of the paper or
dissertation. Do not add extra space between entries. Each entry should be
separated from the next by the regular space interval you have been using in
your paper or dissertation.
7. Psychology: indent the first line of each entry in your list of references the way
you would indent a new paragraph of text; subsequent lines should be flush
with the left margin. Sociology and Economic and Administrative Sciences,
Computer Science, and Mathematics: indent the second and subsequent lines
121
of each entry in your reference list. The first line should be flush with the left
margin. This is called a ‘hanging indent’.
8. In Psychology and Economic and Administrative Sciences, Computer
Science, and Mathematics, capitalise only the first word of a title and subtitle
of a work. The only exceptions are proper names. In Sociology, capitalise all
words in a title except in articles, conjunctions and short prepositions.
9. Psychology: underline titles of books and journals. Underlining of titles
continues beneath commas and periods, as will be shown in the examples
below. Sociology and Economic and Administrative Sciences, Computer
Science, and Mathematics: italicise titles of books, journals, magazines,
newspapers, and other entities considered a ‘publication’ such as a CD-ROM.
10. Sociology: enclose titles of articles in journals, magazines, newspapers in
printed and electronic media, chapters in books, and the like in double
quotation marks. Economic and Administrative Sciences, Computer
Science, and Mathematics: enclose titles of articles in journals, magazines,
newspapers in printed and electronic media, chapters in books, and the like in
single quotation marks.
11. The heading for the list of references is: References.
14.6 Preparing the List of References in Psychology
14.6.1 Books
Model:
Author, A. A., Author, B. B., & Author, C. C. (Year). Title underlined including the
concluding period. City: Publisher.
Examples:
One author:
Silverstone, R. (1994). Television and everyday life. London: Routledge.
More than one author:
122
Brannon, L., & Feist, J. (1997). Health psychology: An introduction to behavior and
health. Pacific Grove, CA: Brooks Cole.
Always list the city of publication, but include state (for the U.S. and Canada)
or country if the city is unfamiliar or if it could be confused with one in another
country.
An edited book:
Wainrib, B. R. (Ed.). (1992). Gender issues across the life cycle. New York: Springer.
A translated and/or republished book:
Indicate, in parentheses at the end, the first publication year of the original:
Beauvoir, S. de. (1997). The second sex. (H. M. Parsley, Ed. and Trans.). New York,
Vintage Books. (Original work published in 1949)
The following example is of a book which was first published in translation. The
original was a lecture delivered in another language:
Piaget, J. (1970). Genetic Epistemology. (Eleanor Duckworth, Trans.). New York:
Columbia University Press. (Original delivered as a lecture in 1968)
An untranslated book:
If the original version of a non-English source (or, non-Turkish, if you are writing
in Turkish) is used, cite the original version. Give the original title and add, in
brackets, the English translation of the title (add the Turkish translation if you are
writing in Turkish). Do not underline the translated title in brackets:
Mann, T. (1972). Freud und die zukunft [Freud and the future]. Frankfurt a. Main: S.
Fischer Verlag. (Original work published in 1936)
A book with no author or editor named:
Meriam-Webster’s collegiate dictionary (10th ed.). (1994). Springfield, MA:
Merriam-Webster.
A government publication:
National Institute of Mental Health. (1990). Clinical training in serious mental
illnesses (DHHS Publication No. ADM 90-1679). Washington, DC: U. S. Government
Printing Office.
123
Use the model for books when entering other non-periodical items such as reports,
brochures, or audiovisual material.
Doctoral dissertations and Master’s theses
Doctoral dissertation abstracted in Dissertation Abstracts International (DAI):
Bower, D. L. (1993). Employee assistant programs supervisory referrals:
Characteristics of referring and nonreferring supervisors. Dissertation Abstracts
International, 54 (01), 534B.
If the microfilm of the dissertation, obtained from University Microfilms, is used as
the source, give, in parentheses placed at the end, the University Microfilms
number in addition to the volume and page numbers in DAI:
Bower, D. L. (1993). Employee assistant programs supervisory referrals:
Characteristics of referring and nonreferring supervisors. Dissertation Abstracts
International, 54 (01), 534B. (University Microfilms No. AAD93-15947)
Unpublished doctoral dissertation and Master’s thesis:
The format shown here is for doctoral dissertations that do not appear in DAI:
Wilfley, D. E. (1989). Interpersonal analyses of bulimia: Normal-weight and obese.
Unpublished doctoral dissertation, University of Missouri, Columbia, USA.
For a Master’s thesis, use the following model:
Almeida, D. M. (1990). Fathers’ participation in family work: Consequences for
fathers’ stress and father-child relations. Unpublished master’s thesis, University of
Victoria, Victoria, British Columbia, Canada.
14.6.2 Articles and Parts of Books
Model for an article in a periodical (journal, magazine, or newspaper):
Author, A. A., Author, B. B. & Author, C. C. (Year of Publication, add month
and day of publication for daily, weekly or monthly publications). Title of article. Title of
Periodical, Volume Number, pages.
You need list only the volume number if the periodical uses continuous pagination
throughout the volume. If each issue begins with page 1, then you should list the
issue number as well: Title of Periodical, Volume (Issue), pages.
Examples:
124
Conger, R. (1997). The effects of positive feedback on direction and amount of
verbalization in a social setting. American Journal of Sociology, 79, 1179-259.
Kerni, M. H., Cornell, D. P., Sun, C. R., Berry, A., & Harlow, T. (1993). There’s
more to self-esteem than whether it is high or low: The importance of stability of selfesteem. Journal of Personality and Social Psychology, 65, 1190-1204.
Ziff, L. (1995, February 20). The other lost generation. Saturday Review, 15-18.
If more than one article by the same author was published in one year:
Dewhirst, C. (1986a). Hot air over the Himalayas. World Geographic, 1 (4), 44-45.
Dewhirst, C. (1986b). Cold water around the Atlantic. World Geographic, 1 (5), 3239.
The entry for a review article must identify the work under review as well. The
following form also holds for reviews of films, television shows, performances,
etc.:
Baumeister, R. F. (1993). Exposing the self-knowledge myth [Review of the book
The self-knower: A hero under control]. Contemporary Psychology, 38, 466-467.
Model for part of a non-periodical publication such as a book chapter or an
article in an edited book:
Author, A. A., & Author, B. B. (Year of Publication). Title of chapter. In A. Editor
& B. Editor (Eds.), Title of book (pages of chapter). Location: Publisher.
Unlike the entry for an article in a periodical publication, for an article in a book,
use pp. before the page numbers (ss. if you are writing in Turkish). The first
example below cites a part of a single-author book. The second example cites an
article in an edited, multi-author book with a single editor, while the third example
is from a book with two editors:
Unger, R. M. (1984). Passion. In Passion: An essay on personality (pp. 91-271).
London: Collier Macmillan.
O’Neil, J. M., & Egan, J. (1992). Men’s and women’s gender role journeys:
metaphor for healing, transition, and transformation. In B. R. Wainrib (Ed.), Gender issues
across the life cycle (pp. 107-123). New York: Springer.
125
Bjork, R. A. (1989). Retrieval inhibition as an adaptive mechanism in human
memory. In H. L. Roediger III & F. I. M. Craik (Eds.), Varieties of memory and
consciousness (pp. 309-330). Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum.
The following is the format for a chapter in a volume in a series. List the series
editor first and the volume editor second:
Maccoby, E. E., & Martin, J. (1983). Socialization in the context of the family:
parent-child interaction. In P. H. Mussen (Series Ed.) & E. M. Hetherington (Vol. Ed.),
Handbook of Child Psychology: Vol. 4. Socialization, personality, and social development
(4th ed., pp. 1-101). New York: Wiley.
When using an untranslated article or chapter in an edited book, give the
original title of the article or chapter and add, in brackets, the English translation of
the article or chapter title (add the Turkish translation if you are writing in
Turkish):
Davydov, V. V. (1972). De introductie van het begrip grootheid in de eerste klas
van de basisschool: Een experimenteel onderzoek [The introduction of the concept of
quantity in the first grade of primary school: An experimental study]. In C. F. Van Parreren
& J. A. M. Carpay (Eds.), Sovietpsychologen aan het woord (pp. 227-289). Groningen,
The Netherlands: Wolters-Noordhoff.
When using a translated article, chapter or other part of an edited book, or a
volume in a multi-volume or re-published work, use the following model. Place
the translator’s name after the editor’s name:
Freud, S. (1961). The ego and the id. In J. Strachey (Ed. and Trans.), The standard
edition of the complete psychological works of Sigmund Freud (Vol. 19, pp. 3-66).
London: Hogarth Press. (Original work published 1923)
When using a translated article or chapter in an edited book, reprinted from
another source:
Piaget, J. (1988). Extracts from Piaget’s theory (G. Gellerier & J. Langer, Trans.).
In K. Richardson & S. Sheldon (Eds.), Cognitive development to adolescence: A reader
126
(pp. 3-18). Hillsdale, NJ: Erlbaum. (Reprinted from Manual of child psychology, pp. 703732, by P. H. Mussen, Ed., 1970, New York: Wiley)
An entry in an encyclopaedia uses the following form:
Bergmann, P. G. (1993). Relativity. In The new encyclopedia Britannica (Vol. 26,
pp. 501-508). Chicago: Encyclopedia Britannica.
14.6.3 Work Discussed in a Secondary Source
If you use a source about which you have read in another secondary source, cite
both sources jointly as in the following example:
Coltheart, M., Curtis, B., Atkins, P., & Haller, M. (1993). Models of reading aloud:
Dual-route and parallel-distributed-processing approaches. Psychological Review, 100,
589-608.
This means, you read Coltheart et al., and found out about the article in the
Psychological Review from Coltheart et al. Though this is not indicated on your list
of References, your in-text citation will have indicated the author of the article in
the Psychological Review.
14.6.4 Electronic Sources
Model for a web page:
Author, A. A. (Date of Publication or Revision). Title of full work [online].
Available: full web address. (Date of access).
Model for an online journal or magazine:
Author, A. A., & Author, B. B. (Date of Publication). Title of article. In Title of
full work [online]. Available: full web address. (Date of access).
‘Date of access’ in the models above indicates the date you visited the website or
online publication. Frequently, online publications have designated paragraphs
rather than pages.
Examples:
127
Kenneth, I. (1995). A Buddhist response to the nature of human rights. [9 pars.]
Journal of Buddhist Ethics [online]. Available: http://www.cac.psu.edu/jbe/ twocont/html
(6 May 1998).
Daly, B. (1997). Writing argumentative essays. [online]. Available: http://www.
esplanet.com/teachertools/argueweb (17 April 2001).
The Publication Manual of the American Psychological Association indicates that
since electronic mail (e-mail) is personal communication not accessible to the
public, it should not be entered on your reference list. When you cite an electronicmail message in your text, acknowldge it in parenthetical citation form. For
inclusion in your list of references, consult with the coordinator of the Dissertation
Course or your supervisor.
14.7 Preparing the List of References in Sociology
As in the sample list of references for sociology in Appendix O in the back of
this book, the type of research undertaken may require a distinction to be made
between Primary and Secondary sources used. For the explanation of this
distinction, see Section 13.2 above.
14.7.1 Books and Reports
Model and Examples:
Author’s last name, authors first name(s). Year. Title Italicised, All Words Except Articles,
Short Prepositions,Conjunctions Are Capitalised. Place: Publisher.
Mason, Karen. 1974. Women’s Labor Force Participation. Research Triangle Part, NC:
National Institutes of Health.
Tezcan, Sabahat, Carol E. Carpenter Yaman, and Nusret Fişek. 1980. Abortion in Turkey.
Ankara: Hacettepe Üniversitesi Yayınları.
When you cite a part of an edited book:
Barnett, Steven. 1998. “Sport.” Pp. 190-212 in Television: An International History, edited
by Anthony Smith and Richard Paterson. Oxford: Oxford University Press.
When you cite a report:
Bailey, Thomas. 1989. “Technology, Skills, and Education in the Apparel Industry,”
(Technical Report). National Center on Education and Employment, Teachers
College, Columbia University, New York.
128
14.7.2 Periodicals
Journals:
Author’s last name, authors first name(s). Year. “Title of Article in Double Quotation
Marks.” Title of Journal Italicised, All Words Except Articles, Short Prepositions,
Conjunctions Are Capitalised. Volume Number: Page Numbers.
Conger, Rand. 1997. “The Effects of Positive Feedback on Direction and Amount of
Verbalization in a Social Setting.” American Journal of Sociology 79: 1179-259.
Schwartz, Hillel. 1985. “The Zipper and the Child.” Notebooks in Cultural Analysis 2
(1985): 1-31.
Magazines:
Author’s last name, authors first name(s). “Title of Article in Double Quotation Marks,”
Title of Magazine Italicised, All Words Except Articles, Short
Prepositions,Conjunctions Are Capitalised, Full Date of the Magazine, Page
Numbers Preceded by pp.
Note that the only places where a period is used are after the author’s name and at
the end of the entry. Periods after the title of the article and of the publication in a
journal entry are replaced by commas. Even when a magazine prints an issue
number, this is not given in the bibliographic entry. Page numbers are preceded by
the designation pp. entirely in lower case:
Rogers, Ben. “Behind the Veil,” Lingua Franca, July-August 1999, pp. 57-64.
Ziff, Larzer. “The Other Lost Generation,” Saturday Review, February 20, 1995, pp. 1518.
Newspapers:
“Duvarları Kurabiyeden,” Radikal, October 27, 2001, p. 1.
Newspaper editorial, Lafayette Journal & Courier, December 12, 1998, p. A-6.
Okyay, Sevin. “Büyük Adam, Küçük Aşk,” Radikal, October 27, 2001, Saturday Insert, p.
3.
129
If a newspaper article is signed, start the entry with the author’s name typed in
reverse order.
14.7.3 Public Documents
Sociological studies are likely to use various kinds of public documents. But
because the nature of public documents is so varied, the form of entry for such
cannot be standardised. Follow the essential principles of the bibliographical entry
form in sociology as represented above, and give as much information as needed
for your reader to be able to locate the document easily.
14.7.4 Unpublished Sources
Occasionally, the need to cite an unpublished document may arise. As with
public documents, these too, vary and resist standardisation. Again, follow the
essential principles of the bibliographical entry form in sociology as represented
above, and give as much clarifying information as you can.
For example, if you are citing an unpublished book or article manuscript,
indicate in your list of References, the author’s name (typed in reverse), the year of
the study, and the title of the manuscript. Place the title in double quotation marks
if an article, italicise it if a book-length study. Follow this information with the
phrase, ‘Unpublished Manuscript’. If the manuscript you are citing is ‘Work-inProgress’, indicate that. A personal interview conducted by you may be indicated
as in the following:
Personal interview with Odili Donald Odita, New York, October 26, 1998.
14.8 Preparing the List of References in Economic and Administrative
Sciences, Computer Science, and Mathematics
14.8.1 Books
The model for an authored or edited book is the following:
Author, A. A. & Author, B. B. Year, Title Italicised, All Words Except Articles, Short
Prepositions,Conjunctions Are Capitalised, Publisher, Place of Publication.
If the book is edited, the designation (ed) for a single editor, and (eds) for
130
multiple editors follows the name(s). Aside from the full last name, only the initials
of a name are given. There is no punctuation preceding the year, except for the
period marking the author’s initial:
Hervé, M. 1995, Cooperative Microeconomics: A Game-Theoretic Introduction,
Princeton University Press, Princeton, NJ.
Sözer, Ö. 1993, Kadın ve Benzeri: Bir Kadın Ütopisi, Varlık Yayınları, Istanbul.
Osborne, M. J. & Rubinstein, A. 1990, Bargaining and Markets, Academic Press, San
Diego.
Okyavuz, Ü. H. (ed) 1999, Sağlık Psikolojisi: Giriş, Türk Psikologlar Derneği,
Ankara.
Raybould, D. M. & Firth, A. (eds) 1991, Law of Monopolies: Competition Law and
Practice in the USA, EEC, Germany, and the UK, Graham & Trotman, London.
A book with no author:
Cassell’s French-English, English-French Dictionary 1951, 5th rev. edn, Funk &
Wagnalls Company, New York.
14.8.2 Articles or Chapters in Books
The model for the bibliographic entry for an article or chapter alone in a
book is the following:
Author, A. A. & Author, B. B. Year, ‘Unitalicised title of article in single quotation
marks’, in Title of Book Italicised, eds A. A. Editor & B. B. Editor, Publisher, Place of
Publication.
Notice that words in the title of the article are not capitalised except for the first
word of a title. Titles of books are italicised as usual. Precise page numbers for
the chapter or article are indicated, preceded by pp. for ‘pages’ or ss. in
Turkish-language text:
Tuschen, B. & Fiegenbaum, W. 1997, ‘Techniques of Exposure’, in Treating
Anxiety Disorders, eds W. T. Roth & I. D. Yalom, Jossey-Bass, San Fransisco,
pp. 32-61.
Yumul, A. 1999, ‘Kuştepe’nin Kuruluşu ve Kimliği’, in Kuştepe Araştırması 1999, ed
131
G. Kazgan, İstanbul Bilgi Üniversitesi Yayınları, Istanbul, pp. 33-46.
Article or chapter in a book with no author:
‘Solving the Y2K problem’ 1997, in Technology Today and Tomorrow, ed D. Bowd,
Van Nostrand Reinhold, New York, p. 67.
14.8.3 Periodicals
The model for the bibliographic entry for an article in a periodical is the
following:
Author, A. A. Year, ‘Unitalicised title of article in single quotation marks’, Title of
the Journal Italicised, vol. number, issue number, page numbers.
Notice that words in the title of the article are not capitalised except for the first
word of a title. Titles of periodical publications are italicised as usual. Precise
page numbers for the chapter or article are indicated, preceded by pp. for
‘pages’ or ss. in Turkish-language text. If the article takes up a single page, use
p. or s.:
Dewhirst, C. 1986, ‘Hot air over the Himalayas’, World Geographic, vol. 1, no. 4, pp.
44-45.
Solomon, N. 2001, ‘Hiding out in cyberspace’, Humanist, vol. 61, no. 4, p. 17.
Verheul, E. & Rowson, M. 2001, ‘Poverty reduction strategy papers’, British Medical
Journal, vol. 323, no. 7305, pp. 120-21.
If the journal does not identify volume and issue number, but assigns a single issue
number, then skip designations such as vol. and no. and only type in the issue
number in the appropriate place:
Harris, C. 1997, ‘British National Identity, ‘race’ and empire’, Toplumbilim, 7, pp. 7785.
In the bibliographic entry of a newspaper article, indicate precise date as well
as page number. Abbreviate the name of the month:
Legge, K. 1987, ‘Labor to cost the “Keating Factor”’, Times on Sunday, 1 Feb., p. 2.
132
If you cite more than one item published by an author in the same year, identify
entries by letters affixed to the publication year:
Dewhirst, C. 1986a, ‘Hot air over the Himalayas’, World Geographic, vol. 1, no. 4,
pp. 44-45.
Dewhirst, C. 1986b, ‘Cold water around the Antarctic’, World Geographic, vol. 1, no.
5, pp. 32-39.
133
Appendix A
Dissertation Student Follow-Up Form
133
Dissertation Student Follow-Up Form
Supervisor:
Student:
Coordinator:
Topic:
No.
Date
Issues Covered
134
Appendix B
Dissertation Topic Approval Form
135
DISSERTATION TOPIC APPROVAL FORM
2001-2002
DISSERTATION TOPIC TITLE:
Student’s Number:
Student’s Name, Surname:
Signature:
Supervisor’s Name, Surname:
Signature
Second Reader’s Name, Surname:
Signature
Coordinator’s Name, Surname:
Signature
Date of Approval:
Original signed copy will be given to the Coordinator
One copy will be given to the Supervisor
One copy will be given to the student
136
Faculty of Communication Med 401 – Dissertation
Midterm Jury
Proposal Presentation
Supervisor:
Student:
Topic:
Relevance of the topic:
Approach:
Literature:
Academic reasons:
Thesis statement:
Notes (changes):
Grade:
Supervisor (signature):
Jury (signature):
137
Appendix C
Dissertation Grade Form
138
İstanbul Bilgi University
Dissertation Grade Form
Supervisor:
Second Reader:
Student:
Title:
Approach:
Literature:
Consistency with the thesis statement:
Consistency of the ideas and approaches:
Format:
Notes:
Agreed Grade (out of 100):
Supervisor / Grade:
(signature):
Second Reader / Grade:
(signature):
139
Appendix D
Dissertation Title Page
140
İSTANBUL BİLGİ UNIVERSITY
FACULTY OF ECONOMIC
AND ADMINISTRATIVE SCIENCES
Title
Subtitle, If Applicable
Author’s Name and Surname
Istanbul June 2002
141
İSTANBUL BİLGİ UNIVERSITY
FACULTY OF SCIENCE AND LETTERS
Title
Subtitle, If Applicable
Author’s Name and Surname
Istanbul June 2002
142
İSTANBUL BİLGİ UNIVERSITY
FACULTY OF COMMUNICATION
Title
Subtitle, If Applicable
Author’s Name and Surname
Istanbul June 2002
143
İSTANBUL BİLGİ UNIVERSITY
FACULTY OF LAW
Title
Subtitle, If Applicable
Author’s Name and Surname
Istanbul June 2002
144
Appendix E
Dissertation Approval Page
145
İSTANBUL BİLGİ UNIVERSITY
FACULTY OF ECONOMIC
AND ADMINISTRATIVE SCIENCES
Title
Subtitle, If Applicable
Submitted by
Name and Surname
In Partial Fulfilment of
the Requirements for the Degree of Bachelor of Arts in
Name of the Discipline
June 2002
Approved by:
Space for Head of Department’s Signature
Head of Department’s
Name and Surname
Space for Supervisor’s Signature
Supervisor’s
Name and Surname
146
Head of Department
Dissertation Supervisor
İSTANBUL BİLGİ UNIVERSITY
FACULTY OF ECONOMIC
AND ADMINISTRATIVE SCIENCES
Title
Subtitle, If Applicable
Submitted by
Name and Surname
In Partial Fulfilment of the
Requirements for the Degree of Bachelor of Science in
Name of the Discipline
June 2002
Approved by:
Space for Head of Department’s Signature
Head of Department’s
Space for Supervisor’s Signature
Supervisor’s
147
Name and Surname
Name and Surname
Head of Department
Dissertation Supervisor
İSTANBUL BİLGİ UNIVERSITY
FACULTY OF SCIENCE AND LETTERS
Title
Subtitle, If Applicable
Submitted by
Name and Surname
In Partial Fulfilment of
the Requirements for the Degree of Bachelor of Arts in
Name of the Discipline
June 2002
Approved by:
Space for Head of Department’s Signature
Space for Supervisor’s Signature
148
Head of Department’s
Name and Surname
Head of Department
Supervisor’s
Name and Surname
Dissertation Supervisor
İSTANBUL BİLGİ UNIVERSITY
FACULTY OF SCIENCE AND LETTERS
Title
Subtitle, If Applicable
Submitted by
Name and Surname
In Partial Fulfilment of the
Requirements for the Degree of Bachelor of Science in
Name of the Discipline
June 2002
Approved by:
149
Space for Head of Department’s Signature
Head of Department’s
Name and Surname
Head of Department
Space for Supervisor’s Signature
Supervisor’s
Name and Surname
Dissertation Supervisor
İSTANBUL BİLGİ UNIVERSITY
FACULTY OF COMMUNICATION
Title
Subtitle, If Applicable
Submitted by
Name and Surname
In Partial Fulfilment of
the Requirements for the Degree of Bachelor of Arts in
Name of the Discipline
June 2002
Approved by:
150
Space for Head of Department’s Signature
Head of Department’s
Name and Surname
Head of Department
Space for Supervisor’s Signature
Supervisor’s
Name and Surname
Dissertation Supervisor
İSTANBUL BİLGİ UNIVERSITY
FACULTY OF LAW
Title
Subtitle, If Applicable
Submitted by
Name and Surname
In Partial Fulfilment of
the Requirements for the Degree of Bachelor of Laws in
Name of the Discipline
June 2002
151
Approved by:
Space for Head of Department’s Signature
Head of Department’s
Name and Surname
Head of Department
Space for Supervisor’s Signature
Supervisor’s
Name and Surname
Dissertation Supervisor
152
Appendix F
Sample Abstracts
152
Abstract
The Zenobia figure is the mainstay of the defence of women’s education in
the transition period from the medieval to the modern. While works where
Zenobia’s name and history appear have elicited attention from scholars, the
question of why Zenobia has figured in western letters from Boccaccio to
Elyot and beyond has rarely been asked. The present study seeks the answer
to that question. It argues that the reason the defence of women’s education
crystallised in Zenobia is that she was a widow, and moreover a queen who
had access to the public sphere and the means of relatively free circulation
in it. The fact that those means were military and political enabled later
defenders of women’s education to elaborate on the public uses of educating
women. Thus the figure of Zenobia is the crux of issues concerning
women’s education in the transition from the medieval to the early modern.
The itinerary of continuity and difference in this dissertation pursues its
object in the following works: Giovanni Boccaccio’s De claris mulieribus
(c.1361-75), Geoffrey Chaucer’s The Monkes Tale (c.1372-80), Christine de
Pizan’s Le livre de la cité des dames (c.1405), Desiderius Erasmus’ Vidua
Christiana (1529), Sir Thomas Elyot’s The Defence of Good Women (1540).
Chapters studying these works are preceded by an overview of women’s
education between the years 1350-1550, in order to point out under what
circumstances the authors wrote about the education of women. A separate
chapter is devoted to Pizan’s life since the content of her works, besides
revealing her involvement with the political and social events of her time,
derived directly from her life, and in many ways, Pizan’s biography itself
overlapped with and informed her interpretation of the Zenobia figure. The
Epilogue consists of a brief look forward in history and describes the
dimensions the Zenobia story would attain in England after Elyot.
153
Abstract
This project is prepared in order to find out how to make a z-transform
design of one type of sampled data systems. It intends to discover the ztransforms of common functions and to prove them, and to gain insight into
the design methods of sampled data systems. The most important aim of the
project is to make discoveries about z-transform and apply it by using
methods such as Matlab. After an introductory chapter and an outline of the
text to follow, this study covers the analysis and design of discrete-time
linear control systems.
154
Abstract
This study focuses on female undergraduates’ perceptions about prospective
career barriers and their expectations about overcoming those barriers.
Participants (120 female undergraduates in the departments of business and
economics) completed a brief questionnaire, a Generalised Self-Efficacy
Scale, an Attitudes towards Female Managers Scale, and a measure of
Coping-Efficacy for future career barriers. Findings revealed that a larger
proportion of the participants (60 %) consider the personal factors as the
most determining agent in females’ career development. There were no
significant correlations found among the general self-efficacy levels and
coping efficacy scores. Having some kind of work experience was found to
be influential on attitudes towards female managers, and on coping-efficacy
for personal barriers. Moreover, experience of career counselling was found
to be significantly related to attitudes towards females, coping-efficacy for
organisational barriers, and coping-efficacy for personal barriers. The
mediating role of coping-efficacy beliefs in the process of females’ career
development and ideas for future research on barriers to career development
are discussed.
155
Abstract
The project, concerning ‘nationalism in Turkish history textbooks’, aims to
analyse the nationalist inclinations in high school history textbooks. To understand
the nationalist inclinations better, the study aims to compare history textbooks of
different periods. The study also presents and approach to the question of, ‘if
nationalism is really imagined, as Benedict Anderson defines it, do textbooks
have any effect on it?’ Another crucial question that has to be evaluated is
whether history textbooks have any effect on reproducing the national identity?
Such a study will also be useful in analysing the distinction between ‘us’ and the
‘they’. In other words, how is the ‘other’ reflected in textbooks? Could such a
study lead us to agree with the historian Buttenfield?
156
Abstract
The aim of this paper is to analyse Pedro Almodavar’s cinema and his
women characters within a perspective that differs from that of feminism. It
consists of Almodavar’s life and the textual analysis of three of his films.
The analysis is carried out against the background of the myth concerning
man and woman which has acquired aspects of a new dictum.
157
Appendix G
Sample Acknowledgments
158
Acknowledgments
I would like to express my gratitude to my thesis supervisor Assistant
Professor Hale Bolak Boratav, for her guidance and invaluable contribution.
I feel indebted to her for her generosity in sharing her time, sources and
works, as well as for her continued support, patience and understanding in
every stage of this study. The writing of this thesis represents only part of
her guidance and encouragement that made the research possible for me.
I am deeply thankful to Assistant Professor Hasan Bahçekapılı who
advised me regarding the statistical analyses of the study, and to Aslı
Atamer who shared her time and ideas to improve the study with helpful
comments and contributions.
I would also like to thank all my friends and my cousin Ayşe Sığın for
their priceless efforts during the collection of the data for the study, and to
Mr. Koray Akhan for his continued help and support.
Last but certainly not least, I want to thank my family, especially my
mother Kıymet Aymir and my father İhsan Aymir, for their enthusiastic
support and understanding in every step I take.
159
Acknowledgments
I have been reading about Orientalism for a number of years, but most of this
book was written during 1975-1976, which I spent as a fellow at the Center for
Advanced Study in the Behavioral Sciences, Stanford, California. In this unique
and generous institution, it was my good fortune not only to have benefitted
agreeably from several colleagues, but also from the help of Joan Warmbrunn,
Chris Hoth, Jane Kielsmeier, Preston Cutler, and the center’s director, Gardner
Lindzey. The list of friends, colleagues, and students who read, or listened to, parts
or the whole of this manuscript is so long as to embarrass me, and now that it has
finally appeared as a book, perhaps even them. Nevertheless I should mention with
gratitude the always helpful encouragement of Janet and Ibrahim Abu-Lughod,
Noam Chomsky, and Roger Owen, who followed this project from its beginning to
its conclusion. Likewise I must gratefully acknowledge the helpful and critical
interest of the colleagues, friends, and students in various places whose questions
and discussion sharpened the text considerably. André Schiffrin and Jeanne Morton
of Pantheon Books were ideal publisher and copy editor, respectively, and made
the ordeal (for the author, at least) of preparing the manuscript an instructive and
genuinely intelligent process. Mariam Said helped me a great deal with her
research on the early modern history of Orientalist institutions. Apart from that,
though, her loving support really made much of the work on this book not only
enjoyable but possible.
E. W. S.
New York
September-October 1977
160
Appendix H
Samples of the Table of Contents
161
Table of Contents
1. Introduction: On the Threshold between the Medieval and the Early
Modern.......................................................................................................1
2. Women’s Education 1350-1550.................................................................8
3. ‘Zenobia’ before 1400..............................................................................28
4. “Seulette suy et seulette veuil estre”: The Making of the Medieval
Authoress.................................................................................................42
5. Zenobia the Intellectual: Christine de Pizan............................................65
6. “Monks hate books and women love them”: The Widow in
Desiderius Erasmus.................................................................................78
7. Zenobia the Queen: Sir Thomas Elyot.....................................................95
8. Epilogue.................................................................................................114
9. Bibliography..........................................................................................117
162
Table of Contents
Page
Foreword.............................................................................................………i
Summary……………………………………………………………………ii
List of Figures……………………………………………………………...vi
List of Tables……………………………………………………………...viii
1. Introduction…………………………………………………………………1
1.1 Overview………………………………………………………………1
1.2 Digital Control Systems……………………………………………….1
1.3 Plan of the Project……………………………………………….…….8
2. Discrete-Time Systems and the z-Transform………………………………9
2.1 The z-Transform………………………………………………………9
2.2 The z-Transform of Common Functions…………………………….12
2.3 The Properties of the z-Transform……………………………………18
2.4 The Inverse z-Transform……………………………………………...26
2.5 Solving Difference Equations with z-Transform……………………..30
3. Sampling and Reconstruction……………………………………………..34
3.1 The Ideal Sampler……………………………………………….. …..34
4. System Time-Response Characteristics……………………………………38
4.1 System Time Response………………………………………………..38
4.2 Steady-State Accuracy……………...…………………………….……44
5. Stability Analysis Techniques………………………………………………53
5.1 Stability…………………………………………………………………53
163
6. The Design Methods of Sampled Data Systems…………………………….60
6.1 The Design Sampled Data Systems by Using the Routh-Hurwitz
Criterion……………………………………………………………….60
6.2 The Design Sampled Data Systems by Using the Root locus
Method………………………………………………………………...68
6.3 Digital PID Controllers and Their Implementations………………….76
6.4 Design of Sampled Data Systems Using Matlab……………………...80
7. The Design of One Type of Sampled Data System…………………………83
7.1 The Plant—an Automobile Cruise—System…………………………..83
7.2 The Design of PID Controller for “an automobile cruise—control
system”…………………………………………………………………85
Conclusion………………………………………………………………….106
References…………………………………………………………………..107
Autobibliography……………………………………………………………108
164
Table of Contents
1. Introduction………………………....…………...…..…………..…1 - 16
2. Method……………………………………………….…………...16 - 23
2.1. Sample…………………………............……………...……......…16
2.2. Instruments……………………………………………..…...…….17
2.3. Procedure………………………………………………….………21
3. Results………………………………………………………….…23 - 30
3.1. Demographics…………………………………………….…..…..23
3.2. Correlations……………………………………………………….26
3.3. Anovas………………………………………………………….…27
4. Discussion…………………………………....……………………30- 36
5. References……………………………………....………………...37 - 41
6. Appendix
6.1. Appendix A – Scale of the Pilot Study
6.2. Appendix B – Scale of the Main Study
165
Table of Contents
Introduction……………………………………………………1
Part 1: Imagined Communities and Textbooks In Turkey…………….2
1.1 Benedict Anderson and Imagined Communities…………2
1.2 Ernest Gellner and High Cultures…………………………3
1.3 Anthony Smith and National Identity……………………..4
1.4 Eric Hobsbawm and Invented Traditions…………………6
1.5 Gramsci – Hegemony and Althusser – Ideological State
Apparatus……………………………………………………7
Part 2: History Textbooks In Turkey…………………………………….9
2.1 Nationalism in History Textbooks in the 1930s……………..9
2.2 Nationalism in History Textbooks in the 1960s……………15
2.3 Nationalism in History Textbooks in the 1980s and
Since 1980s…………………………………………………19
Part 3: Nationalism In History Textbooks: A Comparison: 1960 – 1980.20
3.1
Lycée 1 History Textbooks…………………………………21
3.1.1
Emin Oktay and Niyazi Akşit - Tarih Lise 1…….21
3.1.2
İbrahim Kafesoğlu and Altan Deliorman –
Tarih Lise 1………………………………………..24
3.1.3
3.2
Yüksel Turhal and Faruk Sümer – Tarih Lise 1…..26
Lcyée 2 History Textbooks………………………………….31
3.2.1
Emin Oktay – Tarih Lise 2………………………..31
3.2.2
Altan Deliorman – Genel Türk Tarihi 2…………37
3.2.3
Yüksel Turhal – Liseler İçin Tarih 2……………44
166
3.3
Lycée 3 History Textbooks……………………………….53
3.3.1
Emin Oktay – Tarih Lise 3……………………….53
3.3.2
Yüksel Turhal and Gürkan Tekin - Liseler İçin
Tarih 3……………………………………………58
3.3.3
Altan Deliorman – Tarih Lise 3……………………64
3.3.4
Yılmaz Öztuna – Tarih Lise 3……………………68
Conclusions………………………………………………………………74
167
Table of Contents
Introduction…………………………………………………………...1
1. Part One
1.1 Inside the Body, Outside the Vision………………………………4
1.2 One Sex and Two Gender…………………………………………10
2.
3.
Part Two
2.1
The Womanistic Illusions………………………………………13
2.2
Woman Psychology……………………………………………..18
2.3
Virgin Theory……………………………………………………20
Part Three
3.1 From Dancing Under the Blanket to a Postmodern Spain………….21
3.1.1 Who Is Pedro Almodavar?……………………………………23
3.1.2 Filmography: From Earlier Films to All About My Mother…..25
4. Part Four
4.1 Emotional Femininity vs. Fearful Masculinity ……………………..27
4.1.1 Tie Me Up! Tie Me Down!: Representation of Man………….28
4.1.2 High Heels: Representation of Woman………………………31
4.1.3 All About My Mother: Representation of the Transsexual….33
5. Conclusion
5.1 Why Read Almodavar?………………………………………………35
5.2 No Woman, No Cry…………………………………………………..36
Bibliography………………………………………………………………39
Appendix………………………………………………………………….41
168
İçindekiler
A. GENEL İLKE: ADİL YARGILANMA HAKKI………………………………..
I.
Genel Olarak……………………………………………………………..
II.
Uygulama Alanı………………………………………………………….
a. Medeni Hak ve Yükümlülüklerle İlgili Uyuşmazlıklar………………
b. Suç İsnadı…………………………………………………………….
III.
Adil Yargılanma Hakkının Unsur ve Koşulları…………………………..
a. Mahkemeye Ulaşma Hakkı…………………………………………..
b. Yasal, Bağımsız, Tarafsız Mahkeme…………………………………
i.
Yasal Mahkeme……………………………………………….
ii.
Bağımsız Mahkeme…………………………………………..
iii.
Yansız Mahkeme………………………………………………
c. Makul Süre İçinde Yargılama………………………………………….
d. Yargılamanın Açık Olması…………………………………………….
e. Hakkaniyete Uygun Biçimde Yargılama………………………………
B. SUÇSUZLUK KARİNESİ…………………………………………………………
C. ADİL YARGILANMA HAKKI KAPSAMINDA SANIĞA TANINAN ASGARİ
GARANTİLER…………………………………………………………………….
I.
Suçlamanın Niteliği ve Nedeni Hakkında Anladığı Dilde, En Kısa Sürede
ve Ayrıntılı Olarak Bilgilenme Hakkı………………………………………
II.
Savunmanın Hazırlanması İçin Gerekli Zaman ve Kolaylıklara Sahip
Olmak…………………………………………………….…………………
III.
Kendi Kendini Savunmak, Kendi Seçecesği Bir Müdafinin Veya
(Gerektiğinde) Mahkeme Tarafından Görevlendirilecek Bir Müdafinin
Yardımından Yararlanma Hakkı……………………………………………
IV.
Tanıkların Dinlenmesinde Hak Eşitliği……………………………………..
V.
Tercümanın Yardımından Yararlanma Hakkı……………………………….
D. ADİL YARGILANMA HAKKI VE SÖZLEŞMEYE EK 7. PROTOKOL…………
SONUÇ………………………………………………………………………………
169
Appendix I
Samples of the List of Tables
List of Tables
Table 1 The Folk Classification of common ‘Hot’ and ‘Cold’ Symptoms……… p. 113
Table 2 Binary Oppositions relating temparature to Cold Symptoms……………p. 114
Table 3 Binary Oppositions relating temparature to Cold Symptoms……………p. 114
List of Tables
Table 1 The Ratios of Females in Management in Some Countries……..……… p. 3
Table 2 Educational Backgrounds of the Parents………………………………..p. 24
Table 3 Occupational Position of the Parents……………………..……………..p. 24
Table 4 Descriptive Statistics (N=120)…………………………………………..p. 26
Table 5 Correlations between GSE, ATFM and CE Scales (N=120)……………p. 27
Table 6 Significant ANOVA Results…………………………………………….p. 28
Table 7 Means of GSE, ATFM and CE scales reveaşed significant results……..p. 29
List of Tables
Table
Page
1
z-Transforms……………………………………………………………17
2
Responses for Ex 1………………………………………………………40
3
Rules for Root Locus Construction……………………………………...69
170
Appendix J
Samples of the List of Illustrations and List of Figures
List of Illustrations
FRONTISPIECE. Dürer, Self-Portrait as Man of Sorrows, 1522, Bremen, Kunsthalle.
Drawing L. 131 (635), 408 by 209 mm.
1. Dürer, Self-Portrait of 1484, Vienna, Albertina. Drawing L. 448 (996), 275 by 196 mm.
2. Albrecht Dürer the Elder, Self-Portrait, Vienna, Albertina. Drawing L. 589 (1016), 284
by 212 mm.
3. “Younger Master of the Schotten Altarpiece,” Martyrdom of St. Dymphna, Present
Location Unknown.
4. Master of the Augustiner Altarpiece, The Vision of St. Bernard, Nuremberg,
Germanisches National-Museum, 1487.
5. Hans Pleydenwurff, Detail from the Adoration of the Magi, Nuremberg, Lorenzkirche.
6. Dürer, The Wire-Drawing Mill, probably 1489, Berlin, Kupferstichkabinett, Drawing
L. 4 (1367), 286 by 426 mm.
7. Dürer, The Cemetery of St. John’s, probably 1489, Bremen, Kunsthalle. Drawing L.
104 (1369), 290 by 423 mm.
8. Michael Wolgemut (Shop), “Portugalia,” Woodcut from the “Nuremberg Chronicle,”
published 1493.
9. Michael Wolgemut, Dance of the Dead. Woodcut from the “Nuremberg Chronicle,”
published 1493.
10. Michael Wolgemut (Shop; Design by Dürer?), Circe and Odysseus. Woodcut from the
“Nuremberg Chronicle” (435, k, 3), published 1493.
11. St. Potentiana Giving Alms to the Poor. Woodcut from the “Lives of the Saints,”
Nuremberg (Koberger), 1488.
12. The Second and Fourth Works of Charity. Woodcut from “Bruder Claus” (435, a, 2,
4), Nuremberg (Ayrer), 1488.
13. Dürer, Cavalcade, 1489, Bremen, Kunsthalle. Drawing L. 100 (1244), 201 by 309 mm.
Görsel Malzeme Dizini
Sayfa
6-7
Ben Johnson: “To the memory of my beloud, The Author Mr. William
Shakespeare: And what he hath left us.” Mr. William Shakespeares Comedies,
Histories & Tragedies. Londra, Isaac Iaggard ve Ed. Blount, 1623. Harry Elkins
Widener Koleksiyonu, Harvard College Kütüphanesi, Cambridge, Mass.
9
İkiz evler. Henley Sokağı, Stratford. Fotoğraf Andrew Fulgoni, 1989.
10
Shakespeare ailesinin arması. Folger Shakespeare Kütüphanesi, Washington, DC.
11
Stratforddaki Mahalle Kilisesinde Shakespeare’in vaftiz kaydı.
171
14-15 Shakespeare’in Stratford, Kutsal Üçlü Kilisesindeki (Holy Trinity Church) büstü.
15
Birinci Folio’nun iç kapağı. Bkz. yukarıdaki sayfa 6-7 girdisi.
20
Kraliçe Elizabeth maiyetiyle birlikte. Ressamı ve yapılış tarihi bilinmiyor.
Sherborne Malikanesi, Özel Koleksiyon.
25
Swan Tiyatrosunun iç görünümü. Arend van Buchell, 1596. Utrecht Üniversitesi
Kütüphanesi.
28
Titus Andronicus, Birinci Perde. Henry Peacham [?], 1594-95 [?]. Bath Markisi,
Longleat House, Westminster, Wiltshire.
36
The Compact Edition of the Oxford English Dictionary. Oxford, Londra ve
Glasgow: Oxford University Press, 1971; 1986.
47-48 Thomas Hill, The Gardener’s Labyrinth. Folger Shakespeare Kütüphanesi,
Washington, DC.
51
.
52
53
C. Walter Hodges, Globe Tiyatrosu rekonstrüksiyonu. The Times 12 Mayıs 1993.
II. Richard, Birinci Perdeden bir sahne. Andrew Gurr, yay. haz., Richard II.
Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1984.
Shakespeare’in Falstaff ve Mistress Quickly karakterlerinin en eski tasviri. Henry
Marsh, The Wits, or, Sport upon Sport (1666), Folger Shakespeare Kütüphanesi,
Washington, DC.
54-55 Merian, Londra manzarası. Folger Shakespeare Kütüphanesi, Washington, DC.
59
Shakespeare’in döneminden savunma teknikleri. Di Grassi His True Art of
Defence (1594). Harvard College Kütüphanesi, Cambridge, Mass.
62
Richard Burbage ve Edward Alleyn portreleri. Dulwich College’deki portreden
yapılma gravürden. Folger Shakespeare Kütüphanesi, Washington, DC.
William kemp portresi. Nine Days’ Wonder (1600). Folger Shakespeare
Kütüphanesi, Washington, DC. Robert Armin portresi. The Two Maids of MoreClacke (1609), Folger Shakespeare Kütüphanesi, Washington, DC.
63
77
Drake’in yerliler tarafından karşılanışı. Theodor de Bry, America (1595). Folger
Shakespeare Kütüphanesi, Washington, DC.
87
Stratford Gramer Okulu. Fotoğraf Craig R. Thompson. Folger Shakespeare
Kütüphanesi, Washington, DC.
88
Gramer Okulundaki ders malzemelerinden biri. Folger Shakespeare Kütüphanesi,
Washington, DC.
92
Calvin’in kitabının iç kapağı. Jean Calvin, The Institution of Christian Religion,
written in Latin by Master Jean Calvin, and translated into English according to
172
the author’s last edition. Londra, 1561. Folger Shakespeare Kütüphanesi,
Washington, DC.
100
Birinci Folio’da dönemin önemli aktörlerinin yer aldığı liste. Bkz. yukarıdaki
sayfa 6-7 girdisi.
133
J. Gibert, Fırtına gravürü. William Shakespeare The Complete Works. New York
ve New Jersey: Gramercy Books, 1975; 1990.
136
Elizabeth döneminden bir Afrika haritası. Plinius, Naturalis historiae. Venedik,
1525. Folger Shakespeare Kütüphanesi, Washington, DC.
137
Legatus regis Barbariae in Angliam 1600. Shakespeare Enstitüsü, Birmingham,
İngiltere.
139
Royal Shakespeare Company’nin Hırçın Kız performansından iki sahne. İstanbul
Kültür ve Sanat Vakfı.
142
Coşkulu Yolcu’nun ilk baskısının iç kapağı. The Passionate Pilgrime, By W.
Shakespeare. Londra, W. Iaggard, 1599. Harry Elkins Widener Koleksiyonu,
Harvard College Kütüphanesi, Cambridge, Mass.
152
Albrecht Dürer, Otoportre, 1498. Tuval üzerine yağlı boya, 52 x 41 cm; Prado
Ulusal Müzesi [Museo Nacional del Prado], Madrid.
158
Birinci Folio’nun içindekiler sayfası. Bkz. yukarıdaki sayfa 6-7 girdisi.
List of Figures
Figure
Page
1
A single-loop digital control system………………………………………..2
2
The automatic aircraft landing system……………………………………...5
3
The block diagram of the lateral control system……………………………6
4
Block diagrams for a basic control system………………………………….8
5
The impulse series………………………………………………………….10
6
Unit-step function…………………………………………………………..12
7
Sampled un,t ramp function………………………………………………..14
8
Sinusoidal function…………………………………………………………15
9
Representation of e*(t)……………………………………………………...35
10
Representations of the şdeal sampler……………………………………….37
173
11
System and response for Ex1.……………………………………………39
12
System used in Ex2……………………………………………………….40
13
Step response of the systems analyzed in Ex2……………………………42
14
Percent overshoot versus ζ………………………………………………..44
15
Discrete-time system………………………………………………………45
16
Unit parabolic function……………………………………………………49
17
Digital Feedback Control System and z-transform Equivalent System…...50
18
Sampled-data system………………………………………………………53
19
The relation between the s-plane and the z-plane…………………………55
20
The mapping from the s-plane to the z-plane………………………………56
21
Discrete-time system (a)……………………………………………………57
22
Discrete-time system (b)……………………………………………………59
23
Closed-loop sampled data system…………………………………………..63
24
W-plane……………………………………………………………………..66
25
Sampled-data system……………………………………………………….68
26
Root-locus for Ex 1…………………………………………………………73
27
Determination of the system gain at the crossover point on the unit circle…73
28
System for Ex2………………………………………………………………74
29
Root-locus for the system of Ex2……………………………………………75
30
Discrete PID controller………………………………………………………76
31
The block diagram of digital PID controller…………………………………77
32
Digital PID controller system………………………………………………..78
33
An automobile cruise-control system……………………………………..…84
34
An automobile cruise-control system simplified…………………………….84
174
Appendix K
Samples of the List of Symbols and Abbreviations
Abbreviations
Included in the list below are the books which are identified in the footnotes only by their author or
editor. The titles of other publication are normally cited, after the first citation, in shortened forms:
the full forms can be found in the Bibliography.
BL
Bodl.
Bullough
CSPD
CSPF
CSPS
CSPV
Feuillerat
Garnett
GP
Hatf.
HMC
K. de L.
KAO
MP
NA
NRO
OA
Oram
British Library
Bodleian Library
Geoffrey Bullough, ed., Poems and Dramas of Fulke Greville, 2
vols (Edinburgh and London, 1939)
Calendar of State Papers Domestic
Calendar of State Papers Foreign
Calendar of State Papers Spanish
Calendar of State Papers Venetian
Albert Feuillerat, ed., The Prose Works of Sir Philip Sidney, 4 vols
(Cambridge, 1912-26)
George Garnett, ed., Vindiciae, Contra Tyrannos (Cambridge,
1994)
John Gouws, ed., The Prose Works of Fulke Greviller, Lord
Brooke (Oxford, 1986)
Hatfield House, Cecil papers
Historical Manuscripts Commission
Baron J. Kervyn de Lettenhove, ed., Relations Politiques des PaysBas et de l’Angleterre, 11 vols (Brussels, 1882-1900)
Kent Archives Office
Katherine Duncan-Jones and Jan van Dorsten, eds, Miscellaneous
Prose of Sir Philip Sidney (Oxford, 1973)
Sir Philip Sidney, The Countess of Pembroke’s Arcadia (The New
Arcadia), ed. Victor Skretkowicz (Oxford, 1987)
Northamptonshire Record Office
Sir Philip Sidney, The Countess of Pembroke’s Arcadia (The Old
Arcadia), ed. Jean Robertson (Oxford, 1973)
William Oram, ed., The Yale Edition of the Shorter Poems of
Edmund Spenser (New Haven, 1989)
[…]
Kısaltmalar
a.g.y.
Alm.
American Heritage
AnaBritannica
Ar.
Bkz.
Bilişim T.S.
Büy.Bil.T.S.
: adı geçen yapıt
: Almanca
: American Heritage Dictionary
: AnaBritannica Genel Kültür Ansiklopedisi
: Arapça
: Bakınız
: Bilişim Terimleri Sözlüğü (Köksal, 1981)
: Büyük Bilgisayar Terimleri Sözlüğü (Gürsel & Gürsel,
175
Collins-Metro
Çev.
Dış Tic.S.
Eğit.T.S.
Eğit.T.S., Oğuzkan
eğr.
Far.
Fr.
Fr.-T.S.
Gıda S.
İng.
K.
Lat.
Ör.
Toplumbilim T.S.
T.
T.S.
Tur.T.S.
Y.
Yay.
1991)
: Collins-Metro English Learner’s Dictionary / İngilizceTürkçe
: Çeviren
: Dış Ticaret Ansiklopedik Sözlüğü (Alpar & Ongun, 1991)
: Eğitim Terimleri Sözlüğü (Demirel, 1993)
: Eğitim Terimleri Sözlüğü (Oğuzkan, 1993)
: eğretileme
: Farsça
: Fransızca
: Büyük Fransızca-Türkçe Sözlük (Saraç, 1976)
: Gıda Sözlüğü (Türker, 1988)
: İngilizce
: karma (öğe)
: Latince
: örnek
: Temel Toplumbilim Terimleri Sözlüğü (Ozankaya, 1986)
: Türkçe (öğe)
: Türkçe Sözlük
: Açıklamalı Turizm Terimleri Sözlüğü (Aydın, 1990)
: yabancı (öğe)
: Yayına hazırlayan(lar)
Kısaltmalar
AİHM
Avrupa İnsan Hakları Mahkemesi
AİHS
Avrupa İnsan Hakları Sözleşmesi
a.g.e.
Adı geçen eser
a.g.m.
Adı geçen makale
app.
Application
A.Ü.
Ankara Üniversitesi
AY
Anayasa
AYM
Anayasa mahkemesi
bkz.
Bakınız
Bildiri
İnsan Hakları Evrensel Bildirisi
CMUK
Ceza Muhakemeleri Usulü Kanunu
DGM
Devlet Güvenlik Mahkemeleri
DGMKYUHK
Devlet Güvenlik Mahkemeleri Kuruluş ve Yargılama Usulü
Hakkında Kanun
Div.
Divan
Div. K.
Divan Kararları
176
HSYK
Hakim ve Savcılar Yüksek Kurulu
m.
Madde
Mahkeme
Avrupa İnsan Hakları Mahkemesi
R.G.
Resmi Gazete
s.
Sayfa
S.
Sayı
S.B.F.
Siyasal Bilgiler Fakültesi
p.
Paragraf
TCK
Türk Ceza Kanunu
T.İ.H.M.
Türkiye İnsan Hakları Merkezi
Sözleşme
Avrupa İnsan Hakları Sözleşmesi
Yay.
Yayın
177
Appendix L
Sample Bibliography in the Humanities Style
10. Bibliography
Primary Works:
Agrippa, Henricus Cornelius. Declamation on the Nobility and Preeminence of the Female
Sex. Ed. and trans. Albert Rabil, Jr. Chicago and London: University of Chicago
Press, 1996.
Amt, Emilie, ed. Women’s Lives in Medieval Europe: A Sourcebook. New York:
Routledge, 1993.
Aquinas, St. Thomas. An Aquinas Reader: Selections from the Writings of Aquinas. Ed.
Mary T. Clark. Trans. Mary T. Clark, Pierre Conway, and F. R. Larcher. New York:
Image Books, 1972.
Aristotle. Poetics in Poetics, Longinus on the Sublime, Demetrius on Style. Trans. Stephen
Halliwell. Cambridge, Mass., and London: Harvard University Press, 1995.
Armstrong, Regis J., ed. and trans. Clare of Assisi: Early Documents. The Province of St.
Mary of the Capuchin Order: Paulist Press, 1988.
James Aske, Elizabetha triumphans. London: Thomas Orwin, 1588.
Baird, Joseph L. and John R. Kane, ed. La Querelle de la rose: Letters and Documents.
Chapel Hill: University of North Carolina Press, 1978.
Blamires, Alcuin, ed., with Karen Pratt and C. W. Marx. Woman Defamed and Woman
Defended: An Anthology of Medieval Texts. Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1992.
Brucker, Gene, ed. Two Memoirs of Renaissance Florence: The Diaries of Buonaccorso
Pitti and Gregorio Dati. Trans. Julia Martines. New York: Harper & Row, 1967.
Boccaccio, Giovanni. Concerning Famous Women. Trans. Guido Guarino. New
Brunswick, N. J.: Rutgers University Press, 1963.
-----. The Decameron. Trans. with an introduction and notes by G. H. McWilliam. London
and New York: Penguin, 1995.
-----. The Fates of Illustrious Men. Ed. and trans. Lewis Brewer Hall. New York: Frederick
Ungar, 1965.
Bruni, Leonardo. The Humanism of Leonardo Bruni. Selected Texts. Trans. with
introductions by Gordon Griffiths, James Hankins and David Thompson.
Binghamton, N.Y.: Center for Medieval and Early Renaissance Studies, State
University of New York at Binghamton, and The Renaissance Society of America,
1987.
Caesarius of Arles. Sancti Caesarii Episcopi Arelatensis Opera Omnia. Vol. II: Opera
Varia. Ed. D. G. Morin. Maretioli: n.p., 1942.
Castiglione, Baldassare. The Book of the Courtier. Trans. Charles S. Singleton. New York:
Anchor Books, 1959.
Cereta, Laura. Collected Letters of a Renaissance Feminist. Ed., transcribed, and trans. by
Diana Robin. Chicago and London: University of Chicago Press, 1997.
Chaucer, Geoffrey. The Complete Works of Geoffrey Chaucer. Ed. from numerous
manuscripts by the Rev. Walter W. Skeat. Vol 4. Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1897.
Chester, Robert. Loves martyr: or, Rosalins complaint. London: E. B., 1601.
Chrétien de Troyes. Arthurian Romances. Trans. D. D. R. Owen. London and Melbourne:
Dent, 1987.
Dante Alighieri. The Divine Comedy. 3 Vols. Trans. John D. Sinclair. London, New York,
and Toronto: Oxford University Press, 1961.
The Dartmouth Bible. The Old Testament, The Apocrypha, and The New Testament. Ed.
Roy B. Chamberlain and Herman Feldman. Boston: Houghton Mifflin, 1950; 1965.
De Beauvais, Vincent. Miroir historial. Trans. Jean de Vignay. Paris: Verard, 1495-1496.
De Lorris, Guillaume, and Jean de Meun. Le roman de la rose. Ed. Andrè Mary. Paris:
Gallimard, 1949.
-----. The Romance of the Rose. Trans. Charles Dahlberg. 3rd Ed. Princeton, N.J.: Princeton
University Press, 1995.
De Pisan, Christine. Oeuvres poétiques de Christine de Pisan. 3 Vols. Ed. Maurice Roy.
Paris: Firmin Didot, 1886.
178
-----. The Treasure of the City of Ladies, or The Book of the Three Virtues. Trans. with an
introduction by Sarah Lawson. London and New York: Penguin, 1985.
De Pizan, Christine. The body of polycye. London: John Skot, 1521.
-----. The Boke of the Cyte of Ladyes. Trans. Brian Anslay. London: Henry Pepwell, 1521.
-----. The Book of the City of Ladies. Trans. Earl Jeffrey Richards. Foreword by Natalie
Zemon Davis. New York: Persea Books, 1998.
-----. The Book of the City of Ladies. Trans., introduction and notes by Rosalind BrownGrant. London: Penguin, 1999.
-----. The Boke of the fayt of armes and of chyualrye. Westminster: William Caxton, 1489.
-----. The C. Hystories of Troye. Trans. Robert Wyer. London: Robert Wyer, [c.1530].
-----. Christine’s Vision. Trans. Glenda K. McLeod. New York: Garland Publishing, 1993.
-----. Le Débat sur le Roman de la Rose. Ed. Eric Hicks. Paris: Champion, 1977.
-----. ‘Epistre au Dieu d’Amours’ and ‘Dit de la Rose’ with Thomas Hoccleve’s ‘Letter of
Cupide’. Ed. and trans. Thelma S. Fenster and Mary Carpenter Erler. Edition with
bilingual translation. Leiden: Brill, 1990.
-----. Lavision-Christine: Introduction and Text. Ed. Sister May Louis Towner. 1932; New
York: AMS Press, 1969.
-----. Le Livre de la Cité des Dames. Ed. Maureen C. Curnow. 2 Vols. Publ. diss.
Vanderbilt Universtiy, 1975. Ann Arbor: Michigan University Press, 1975.
-----. Le Livre de la mutacion de Fortune. Ed. Suzanne Solente. 4 Vols. Paris: Picard, 19591966.
-----. Le Livre de la Paix. Ed. Charity Cannon Willard. The Hague: Mouton, 1958.
-----. A Medieval Woman’s Mirror of Honor: The Treasury of the City of Ladies. Trans.
with an introduction by Charity Cannon Willard. Ed. with an introduction by
Madeleine Pelner Kosman. Tenafly, N. J.: Bard Hall Press; New York: Persea
Books, 1989.
-----. The morale prouerbes of Cristyne. Trans. Anthony Woodwille. Westminster: William
Caxton, 1478.
-----. The Selected Writings of Christine de Pizan. Ed. Renate Blumenfeld-Kosinski. Trans.
Renate Blumenfeld-Kosinski and Kevin Brownlee. New York and London: W. W.
Norton, 1997.
-----. The Writings of Christine de Pizan. Selected and ed. by Charity Cannon Willard. New
York: Persea Books, 1994.
Elyot, Sir Thomas. The Defence of Good Women. Ed. Edwin Johnson Howard. Oxford:
Miami University Anchor Press, 1940.
-----. The Boke Named the Governour. Ed. Ernst Rhys. New York: E. P. Dutton, 1907.
-----. The Book Named the Governor. Ed. with an introduction by S. E. Lehmberg. London:
Dent, 1962.
Erasmus, Desiderius. The Collected Works of Erasmus, The Correspondence of Erasmus.
Vol 2. Trans. R. A. B. Mynors and D. F. S. Thompson. Annotated by Wallace K.
Ferguson. Toronto: University of Toronto Press.
-----. The Colloquies of Erasmus. Ed. and trans. Craig R. Thompson. Chicago and London:
University of Chicago Press, 1965.
-----. The Correspondence of Erasmus: Letters 1 to 141, 1484 to 1500. Ed. by R. J.
Schoeck, B. M. Corrigan, et. al. Trans. by R. A. B. Mynors and D. F. S. Thomson.
Annotated by Wallace K. Ferguson. Toronto and Buffalo: University of Toronto
Press, 1974.
-----. Erasmus and His Age: Selected Letters of Erasmus. Ed. and trans. Hans Joachim
Hillerbrand. New York: Harper & Row, 1970.
-----. Erasmus of Rotterdam, With a Selection from the Letters of Erasmus. Ed. and trans.
Johan Huizinga. London: Phaidon Press, 1952.
-----. Erasmus on Women. Ed. Erica Rummel. Toronto, Buffalo, and London: University of
Toronto Press, 1996.
-----. The Praise of Folly and Other Writings. Trans. with an introduction and commentary
by Clarence H. Miller. New Haven and London: Yale University Press, 1979.
Froissart, Jean. The Chronicles. Trans with an introduction by Geoffrey Brereton.
Harmondsworth: Penguin, 1968; 1978.
179
-----. Les Chroniques de Jean Froissart. Ed. J. A. C. Buchon. Paris: Desrez, 1835.
Hirten, William James, ed. The Comparation of a Vyrgin and a Martyr (1537). Trans.
Thomas Paynell. Gainesville: Scholars’ Facsimilies and Reprints, 1970.
The Holy Bible containing the Old and New Testaments. King James Version. New York:
American Bible Society, 1998.
Jonson, Ben. The Workes of Beniamin Jonson. London: Will. Stansby, 1616.
Kingsford, C. L., ed. The Stonor Letters and Papers. London: Camden Society
Publications,1919.
Le Fèvre, Jehan. Les lamentations de Mathéolus et Le livre de leesce de Jehan le Fèvre de
Ressons. 2 vols. Ed. A. G. Van Hamel. Paris: Emile Bouillon, 1892-1905.
Lydgate, John. Lydgate’s Fall of Princes. 4 Vols. Ed. Dr. Henry Bergen. London: Oxford
University Press, 1924-1927.
More, Sir Thomas. Utopia. Ed. and trans. Robert M. Adams. New York and London: W.
W. Norton, 1975; 1992.
Nogarola, Isotta. Isottae Nogarolae Veronensis opera quae supersunt omnia, accedunt
Angelae et Zenevarae Nogarolae epistolae et carmina. Ed. E. Abel. Budapest: n.p.,
1886.
Ovidius, Publius Naso. The Metamorphoses of Ovid. Trans. and intoduction by M. M.
Innes. London: Penguin, 1955.
Pace, Richard. De Fructu Qui Ex Doctrina Percipitur (The Benefit of a Liberal Education).
Ed. and trans. Frank Manley and Richard S. Sylvester. New York: Frederick Ungar
Publishing, and The Renaissance Society of America, 1967.
Pettie, George. A petite Pallace. n.p: n.p., [1576].
Quintilian. Institutio oratoria. 4 Vols. Trans. H. E. Butler. Cambridge, Mass: Harvard
University Press; London: William Heinemann, 1921; 1977.
Stapleton, T., ed. The Plumpton Correspondence. London: Camden Society Publications,
1839.
Shakespeare, William. The Complete Works. Original-Spelling Edition, ed. Stanley Wells
and Gary Taylor. Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1986.
Spender, Dale, and Janet Todd, ed. Anthology of British Women Writers: From the Middle
Ages to the Present Day. London: Pandora, 1990.
St. Augustine. The City of God. Trans. Marcus Dods, D. D. Introduction by Thomas
Merton. New York: The Modern Library, 1950.
Thomas, A. H., ed. Calendar of Plea and Memoranda Rolls of the City of London, 13231364. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1926.
Vives, Joannes Ludovicus. Instruction of a Christian Woman. Trans. Richard Hyrde.
London: T. Berhelet. 1540.
Secondary Works:
Works on Christine de Pizan, Her Contemporaries, and Her Culture:
Alissandratos, Alexandra. Courtly Love: Boccaccio and Chaucer. Istanbul: Robert College,
1966.
Bell, Susan Groag. “Christine de Pizan (1364-1430): Humanism and the Problem of the
Studious Woman.” Feminist Studies 3 (1976): 173-84.
Blumenfeld-Kosinski, Renate. “Christine de Pizan and the Misogynistic Tradition.” The
Romanic Review 81: 3 (July 1990): 197-212.
-----. “ ‘Femme de corps et femme par sens’: Christine de Pizan’s Saintly Women.” The
Romanic Review 87: 2 (March 1996): 157-76.
Bornstein, Diane, ed. Ideals for Women in the Works of Christine de Pizan. Ann Arbor:
Michigan University Press, 1981.
Brabant, Margaret, ed. Politics, Gender, and Genre: The Political Thought of Christine de
Pizan. Boulder, Colo.: Westview Press, 1992.
Brown-Grant, Rosalind. Christine de Pizan and the Moral Defence of Women: Reading
Beyond Gender. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1999.
180
Brownlee, Kevin. “Literary Genealogy and the Problem of the Father: Christine de Pizan
and Dante Alighieri.” The Journal of Medieval and Renaissance Studies 23: 3 (Fall
1993): 365-87.
-----. “Widowhood, Sexuality, and Gender in Christine de Pizan.” The Romanic Review 86:
2 (March 1995): 339-54.
----- and Sylvia Huot, ed. Rethinking the Romance of the Rose: Text, Image, Reception.
Philadelphia: University of Pennsylvania Press, 1992.
Brown, Peter. Rev. of Gender and Language in Chaucer by Catherine S. Cox and The
Language of Convention by Laura L. Howes. The Review of English Studies 50: 199
(August 1999): 366-69.
Clements, Robert J. and Joseph Gibaldi. Anatomy of the Novella: The European Tale
Collection from Boccaccio and Chaucer to Cervantes. New York: New York
University Press, 1977.
Crane, Susan. Gender and Romance in Chaucer’s ‘Canterbury Tales’. Princeton, N.J.:
Princeton University Press, 1994.
Curnow, Maureen C. “The Boke of the Cyte of Ladyes, an English Translation of Christine
de Pisan’s Le Livre de la Cité des dames.” Bonnes Feuilles 3 (1974): 115-37.
Delany, Sheila. “ ‘Mothers to Think Back Through’: Who Are They? The Ambiguous
Example of Christine de Pizan.” In Medieval Texts and Contemporary Readers.
Laurie A. Finke and Martin B. Sehichtman, ed. Ithaca, N.Y.: Cornell University
Press, 1987. 312-328.
Dembowski, Peter F. Rev. of La Cité des Dames by Christine de Pizan. Romance Philology
44: 3 (February 1991): 353-59.
Dulac, Liliane and Bernard Ribérmont, ed. Une femme de lettres au Moyen Age: Etudes
autour de Christine de Pizan. Medievalia 16. Orléans: Paradigme, 1995.
Dunlap Smith, Sharon. “New Themes for the City of God around 1400: The Illustrations of
Raoul de Presles’ Translations,” Scriptorium 16 (1982): 66-82.
Enders, Jody. “The Feminist Mnemonics of Christine de Pizan.” Modern Language
Quarterly 55: 3 (September 1994): 231-50.
Fansler, Dean Spruill. Chaucer and the Roman de la rose. Gloucester, Mass.: P. Smith,
1914; 1965.
Flynn, Elisabeth A. and Patrocinio P. Schweickart, ed. Gender and Reading: Essays on
Readers, Texts and Contexts. Baltimore: The Johns Hopkins University Press, 1986.
Gay, Lucy M. “On the Language of Christine de Pisan.” Modern Philology 6 (July 1908):
69-96.
Gottlieb, Beatrice. “The Problem of Feminism in the Fifteenth Century.” In Women of the
Medieval World: Essays in Honor of John H. Mundy. Julius Kirshner and Suzanne
F. Wemple, ed. London: Basil Blackwell, 1992. 337-64.
Hanly, Michael G. Boccaccio, Beauvau, Chaucer: ‘Troilus and Criseyde’: Four
Perspectives on Influence. Norman, Okla.: Pilgrim Books, 1990.
Hindman, Sandra L. “Christine de Pizan: Her Life and Works.” Speculum: A Journal of
Medieval Studies 62 (January 1987): 222-26.
-----. “With Ink and Mortar: Christine de Pizan’s Cité des Dames (An Art Essay).” Feminist
Studies 10 (1984): 457-83.
Kelly, Henry Ansgar. Chaucerian Tragedy. Cambridge and Rochester: D. S. Brewer, 1997.
Laidlaw, J. C. “Christine de Pizan, the Earl of Salisbury, and Henry IV.” French Studies 36
(1982): 129-43.
Laird, Judith. “Good Women and ‘Bonnes Dames’: Virtuous Females in Chaucer and
Christine de Pizan.” The Chaucer Review 30: 1 (Summer 1995): 58-71.
Laskaya, Anne. Chaucer's Approach to Gender in ‘The Canterbury Tales’. Cambridge and
Rochester: D. S. Brewer, 1995.
McLeod, Enid. The Order of the Rose: The Life and Ideas of Christine de Pizan. London:
Chatto & Windus, 1976.
McLeod, Glenda K., ed. The Reception of Christine de Pizan from the Fifteenth through the
Nineteenth Centuries: Visitors to the City. Lewinston, Queenston, Lampater: The
Edwin Mellen Press, 1991; 1992.
181
Miller, Jacqueline T. Poetic License: Authority and Authorship in Medieval and
Renaissance Contexts. New York and Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1986.
Nash, Jerry C. “Renaissance Misogyny, Biblical Feminism, and Hélisenne de Crenne’s
Epistres familieres et invectives.” Renaissance Quarterly 50: 2 (Summer 1997):
379-411.
O’Brien, Dennis J. “Warrior Queen: The Character of Zenobia According to Giovanni
Boccaccio, Christine de Pizan and Sir Thomas Elyot.” Medieval Perspectives 8
(1993): 53-68.
Pernoud, Régine. Christine de Pizan. Paris: Calmann-Lévy, 1982; 1995.
Phillippy, Patricia A. “Establishing Authority: Bocaccio’s De Claris Mulieribus and
Christine de Pizan’s Le livre de la cité des dames.” The Romanic Review 77: 3 (July
1986): 129-62.
Priscilla, Martin. Chaucers’ Women: Nuns, Wives, and Amazons. London: Macmillan,
1995.
Quilligan, Maureen. “Allegory and the Textual Body: Female Authority in Christine de
Pizan’s Livre de la cité des dames.” Romanic Review 79 (1988): 222-48.
Reno, Christine M. Rev. of Le Livre des Trois Vertus by Christine de Pizan. Romance
Philology 46: 2 (November 1992): 197-201.
Richards, Earl Jeffrey, ed. with Joan Williamson, Nadia Margolis, and Christine Reno.
Reinterpreting Christine de Pizan. Athens: University of Georgia Press, 1992.
Solterer, Helen. “Flaming Words: Verbal Violence and Gender in Premodern Paris.” The
Romanic Review 86: 2 (March 1995): 355-79.
Stone, Brian. Chaucer. Harmondsworth: Penguin, 1987; 1989.
Wallace, David. Chaucerian Polity: Absolutist Lineages and Associational Forms in
England and Italy. Stanford: Stanford University Press, 1999.
Willard, Charity Cannon. “An Autograph Manuscript of Christine de Pizan?” Studi francesi
9 (1965): 452-57.
-----. Christine de Pizan: Her Life and Works. New York: Persea, 1984.
Wisman, Josette A. “Jacques Legrand, Christine de Pizan, et la question de la ‘nouvelette’.”
Medium Aevum 63: 1 (Spring 1994): 75-83.
Zimmerman, Margarete, and Dina De Rentiis, ed. The City of Scholars: New Approaches to
Christine de Pizan. Berlin: Walter de Gruyter, 1994.
Works on Desiderius Erasmus, Sir Thomas Elyot, and Their Culture:
Baxandall, Michael. The Limewood Sculptors of Renaissance Germany, 1475-1525. New
Haven: Yale University Press, 1990.
Bronowski J. and Bruce Mazlish. The Westen Intellectual Tradition from Leonardo to
Hegel. 1960. New York: Barnes & Noble, 1993.
Correll, Barbara. “Malleable Material, Models of Power: Women in Erasmus’ ‘Marriage
Group’ and ‘Civility in Boys’.” Journal of English Literary History 57 (1990). 24162.
Fowler, A. “The Extent of Erasmus’ Influence upon English Educational Thought and
Practice in the Sixteenth Century.” Thesis. University of London, 1975.
Hagstrum, Jean G. The Sister Arts: The Tradition of Literary Pictorialism and English
Poetry from Dryden to Gray. Chicago and London: The University of Chicago
Press, 1958; 1987.
Gottesman, Lillian. “Sir Thomas Elyot, Educator.” Diss. New York University, 1963.
Greenblatt, Stephen. “Murdering Peasants: Status, Genre, and the Representation of
Rebellion.” In Representing the English Renaissance. Stephen Greenblatt, ed.
Berkeley, Los Angeles, and London: University of California Press, 1988. 1-31.
Hogrefe, Pearl. The Life and Times of Sir Thomas Elyot, Englishman. Ames: Iowa State
University Press, 1967.
Huizinga, Johan. Erasmus and the Age of Reformation. Trans. F. Hopman. New York:
Harper & Row, 1957.
Jordan, Constance. “Feminism and the Humanists: The Case of Sir Thomas Elyot’s Defense
of Good Women.” Renaissance Quarterly 36: 2 (1983): 181-201.
182
Knappe, Karl-Adolf. Dürer: The Complete Engravings, Etchings, and Woodcuts. London:
Thames and Hudson, 1965.
Lehmberg, Stanford E. Sir Thomas Elyot, Tudor Humanist. Austin, Texas: University of
Texas Press, 1960.
Major, John M. Sir Thomas Elyot and Renaissance Humanism. Lincoln: University of
Nebraska Press, 1964.
Mann Phillips, Margaret. Erasmus and the Northern Renaissance. London: English
Universities Press, 1949.
Marsh, David. Rev. of A Culture of Teaching: Early Modern Humanism in Theory and
Practice by Rebecca W. Bushnell. Renaissance Quarterly 51: 3 (Autumn 1998):
1021-22.
McCutcheon, Elizabeth. “Erasmus’ Representations of Women and Their Discourses.”
Erasmus of Rotterdam Yearbook 12 (1992): 64-86.
Miller, Clarence H. “Some Medieval Elements and Structural Unity in Erasmus’ The Praise
of Folly.” Renaissance Quarterly 27: 4 (Winter 1974): 499-511.
O’Donnell, Anne. “Contemporary Women in the Letters of Erasmus.” Erasmus of
Rotterdam Yearbook 9 (1989): 34-72.
Patton, Elizabeth. “Second Thoughts of a Renaissance Humanist on the Education of
Women: Juan Luis Vives his ‘De institutione feminae Christiane’.” ANQ 5: 2-3
(April-July 1992): 111-15.
Perraud, Louis A. “A Document of Humanist Education: Erasmus’s Commentary on the
Disticha Catonis.” Journal of Rocky Mountain Medieval and Renaissance
Association, Northern Arizona University 9 (1988): 83-92.
Primer, Irwin. “Erasmus and Bernard Mandeville: A Reconsideration.” Philological
Quarterly 72: 3 (Summer 1993): 313-36.
Reynolds, Ernest Edwin. Thomas More and Erasmus. New York: Fordham University
Press, 1965.
Renaudet, Augustin. Erasme et l’Italie. Geneva: Droz, 1998.
Sommers, Paula. “Marguerite de Navarre and Erasmus: Wives’ Tales Retold.” Sixteenth
Century Essays & Studies 49 (1998): 113-23.
Sowards, Kelley. “Erasmus and the Education of Women.” Sixteenth Century Journal 8
(1982): 77-89.
Woodward, William Harrison. Vittorino da Feltre and Other Humanist Educators. New
York: Columbia University Teachers College, 1897; 1963.
Zweig, Stefan. Erasmus of Rotterdam. Garden City, N.Y.: Garden City Publishing, 1937.
Works on the General Literary and Historical Background:
Aston, Margaret. The Fifteenth Century: The Prospect of Europe. 1968. New York: W. W.
Norton, 1979.
Baker, Derek. Medieval Women. Oxford: Basil Blackwell, 1978.
Bennet, H. S. The Pastons and Their England. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press,
1922.
Benton, John F. Self and Society in Medieval France. Toronto: University of Toronto Press
and Medieval Academy of America, 1984.
Bloch, Marc. Feudal Society. 2 Vols. Trans. L. A. Manyon. Chicago: University of
Chicago Press, 1961.
Bloch, R. Howard. Etymologies and Genealogies. A Literary Anthropology of the French
Middle Ages. Chicago: Chicago University Press, 1983; 1986.
Bridenthal, Renate, Claudia Koonz and Susan Stuard, ed. Becoming Visible: Women in
European History. Boston and New York: Houghton Mifflin, 1987.
Cadden, Joan. Meanings of Sex Difference in the Middle Ages: Medicine, Science, and
Culture. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1993.
Chadwick, Whitney. Women, Art and Society. London: Thames and Hudson, 1996.
Cobban, Alan B. The Medieval English Universities: Oxford and Cambridge to c.1500.
Aldershot: Scolar Press, 1988.
Cochrane, Eric. Historians and Historiography in the Italian Renaissance. Chicago and
London: Chicago University Press, 1981.
183
Curtius, Ernst Robert. European Literature and the Latin Middle Ages. Trans. Willard R.
Trask. 1963. Princeton, N.J.: Princeton University Press, 1973.
Duby, Georges. Love and Marriage in the Middle Ages. Trans. Jean Dunnett. Cambridge:
Polity Press, 1994.
-----. Women of the Twelfth Century. 3 Vols. Trans. Jean Birrell. Oxford: Polity Press,
1997; 1998.
----- and Philippe Aries, ed. A History of Private Life. Vols. 2, 3. Cambridge, Mass.:
Belknap Press of Harvard University Press, 1987-1991.
Eckenstein, L. Women Under Monasticism. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1896.
Edelman, Nathan. “The Early Uses of Medium Aevum, Moyen Age, Middle Ages.” The Eye
of the Beholder: Essays in French Literature. Ed. Jules Brody. Baltimore and
London: The Johns Hopkins University Press, 1974. 58-82.
Falco, Raphael. Conceived Presences: Literary Genealogy in Renaissance England.
Amherst: University of Massachusetts Press, 1994.
Fraser, Antonia. The Wives of Henry VIII. New York: Vintage Books, 1992; 1994.
Gelley, Alexander, ed. Unruly Examples: On the Rhetoric of Examplarity. Stanford:
Stanford University Press, 1995.
Gibson, Joan. “Educating for a Silence: Renaissance Women and the Language Arts.”
Hypathia 4: 1 (Spring 1989): 9-28.
Gies, Frances. Women in the Middle Ages. New York: Harper & Row, 1980.
Goodman, Anthony, and Augus MacKay, ed. The Impact of Humanism on Western Europe.
London and New York: Longman, 1993.
Graves, Frank Pierrepont. A History of Education during the Middle Ages and Transition to
Modern Times. New York: Macmillan, 1931.
Hollier, Denis, ed. A New History of French Literature. Cambridge, Mass., and London:
Harvard University Press, 1994.
Huizinga, Johan. The Waning of the Middle Ages: A Study of the Forms of Life, Thought,
and Art in France and the Netherlands in the Fourteenth and Fifteenth Centuries.
Trans. F. Hopman. Harmondsworth: Penguin, 1955; 1990.
Jacksons, William Thomas Hobdell. The Literature of the Middle Ages. New York:
Columbia University Press, 1960.
Jaeger, Werner. Paideia. The Ideals of Greek Culture. Vol. II: In Search of the Divine
Centre. Trans. Gilbert Highet. New York and Oxford: Oxford University Press,
1943; 1986.
Klapisch-Zuber, Christiane, ed. A History of Women in the West. Vol. 2: Silences of the
Middle Ages. Cambridge, Mass., and London: The Belknap Press of Harvard
University Press, 1992; 1995.
Kelly, Joan. Women, History, and Theory. Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1984.
Koenigsberger, H. G. Early Modern Europe: 1500-1789. London and New York:
Longman, 1987;1999.
-----. Medieval Europe: 400-1500. London: Longman, 1987;1998.
Kristeller, Paul Oskar. Medieval Aspects of Renaissance Learning. Ed. and trans. Edward P.
Mahoney. New York: Columbia University Press, 1992.
-----. Renaissance Thought and The Arts: Collected Essays. Princeton, N.J.: Princeton
University Press, 1965.
Labalme, Patricia H., ed. Beyond Their Sex: Learned Women of the European Past. New
York: New York University Press, 1980.
Leff, Gordon. Paris and Oxford Universities in the 13th and 14th Centuries. New York:
John Wiley & Sons, 1968.
Le Goff, Jacques. Intellectuals in the Middle Ages. Trans. Teresa Lavender Fagas.
Cambridge, Mass.: Blackwell, 1994.
Lewis, C. S. English Literature in the Sixteenth Century Excluding Drama. London,
Oxford, and New York: Oxford University Press, 1973.
-----. The Allegory of Love: A Study in Medieval Tradition. Oxford and New York: Oxford
University Press, 1936; 1985.
Mitchell, Linda, ed. Women in Medieval European Culture. New York: Garland
Publishing, 1998.
184
Morewedge, Rosmarie Thee, ed. The Role of Women in the Middle Ages. Albany, N.Y.:
State University of New York Press, 1975.
Murphy, James J. Rhetoric in the Middle Ages. A History of Rhetorical Theory from St.
Augustine to the Renaissance. Berkeley, Los Angeles, and London: University of
California Press, 1974; 1981.
-----, ed. Three Medieval Rhetorical Arts. Berkeley, Los Angeles, and London: University
of California Press, 1971; 1985.
Nicholas, David. The Evolution of the Medieval World: Society, Government and Thought
in Europe: 312-1500. London and New York: Longman, 1992.
Petroff, Elizabeth Alvilda, ed. Medieval Women’s Visionary Literature. New York: Oxford
University Press, 1986.
Power, Eileen. Medieval English Nunneries. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press,
1922.
-----. Medieval Women. Ed. M. M. Postan. 1975. Cambridge and New York: Cambridge
University Press, 2000.
Reiss, Timothy J. Knowledge, Discovery and Imagination in Early Modern Europe: The
Rise of Aesthetic Rationalism. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1997.
-----. The Meaning of Literature. Ithaca and London: Cornell University Press, 1992.
Rose, Mary Beth, ed. Women in the Middle Ages and the Renaissance: Literary and
Historical Perspectives. Syracuse, N.Y.: Syracuse University Press,1990.
Rowling, Marjorie. Everyday Life in Medieval Times. New York: Dorset Press, 1968.
Shahar, Shulamith. The Fourth Estate: A History of Women in the Middle Ages. Trans.
Chaya Galai. London and New York: Routledge, 1990.
Shank, Michael H. “A Female University Student in Late Medieval Krakow.” Signs 12
(Winter 1987): 373-81.
Stuard, Susan M., ed. Women in Medieval Society. Philadelphia: University of
Pennsylvania Press, 1976.
Thrupp, Sylvia L. Merchant Class of Medieval London: 1300-1500. Chicago: University of
Chicago Press, 1962.
Tillyard, Eustace Mandeville Wetenhall. The Elizabethan World Picture. London: Chatto &
Windus, 1943.
Wagner, David L., ed. The Seven Liberal Arts in the Middle Ages. Bloomington: Indiana
University Press, 1986.
Wiesner, Merry. Women and Gender in Early Modern Europe. Cambridge: Cambridge
University Press, 1993.
Wilson, Katherina M. and Elizabeth M. Makowski, ed. Wyyked Wyves and the Woes of
Marriage: Misogamous Literature from Juvenal to Chaucer. Albany, N.Y.: State
University of New York Press, 1990.
Young-Bruehl, Elisabeth. “The Education of Women as Philosophers.” Signs 12 (Winter
1987): 207-22.
Zemon Davis, Natalie and Arlette Farge, ed. A History of the Women in the West. Vol. 3:
Renaissance and Enlightenment Pradoxes. Cambridge, Mass.: Belknap Press of
Harvard University Press, 1993.
185
Appendix M
Sample Works Cited Lists in the Humanities Style
Works Cited
Ahmet Mithat. Çengi. Istanbul: Vakit, 1877.
-----. Denizci Hasan. Ed. Kenan Akyüz. Istanbul: Milli Eğitim Basımevi, 1975.
-----. Dürdane Hanım. Ed. Hakkı Tarık Us. Istanbul: Vakit, 1948.
-----. Henüz Onyedi Yaşında. Istanbul: Vakit, 1943.
-----. Karı Koca Masalı. Ed. Nüket Esen. Istanbul: Kaf, 1999.
-----. Musullu Süleyman. Ed. Behçet Necatigil. Istanbul: Milliyet Yayınları, 1971.
Booth, Wayne C. The Rhetoric of Fiction. London: Penguin Books, 1991.
Bodmer, Pastor Beatriz. The Armature of Conquest, Spanish Accounts of the Discovery of America,
1492-1589. Trans. Lydia Longstreth Hunt. Stanford: Stanford University Press, 1992.
Cervantes, Saavedra Miguel. The Adventures of Don Quixote. Trans. J. M. Cohen. London: Penguin
Books, 1950.
Chandler, F. W. Romances of Roguery: An Episode in the History of the Novel. New York: The
Macmillan Company, 1899.
Fielding, Henry. The History of Tom Jones. London: Penguin Books, 1994.
Findly, Carter. Ahmet Midhat Efendi Avrupa’da. Istanbul: Tarih Vakfı Yurt Yayınları, 1999.
Kearful, Frank J. “Spanish Rouges and English Foundlings: On the Disintegration of Picaresque.”
Genre 4 (1970): 367-90.
Lazarillo de Tormes; Francisco de Quevedo, The Swindler (El Buscón). Trans. Michael Alpert.
London and New York: Penguin Books, 1969.
Miller, Stuart. The Picaresque Novel. Cleveland and London: The Press of Case Western Reserve
University, 1967.
Moran, Berna. Türk Romanına Eleştirel Bir Bakış. I: Ahmet Mithat’tan A. H. Tanpınar’a. Istanbul:
İletişim Yayınları, 1983; 1998.
Okay, Orhan. Batı Medeniyeti Karşısında Ahmet Mithat Efendi. Istanbul: Milli Eğitim Yayınevi,
1989.
Özön, Mustafa Nihat. Türkçede Roman . Istanbul: İletişim Yayınları, 1985.
Parla, Jale. Babalar ve Oğullar: Tanzimat Romanının Epistemolojik Temelleri. Istanbul: İletişim
Yayınları, 1990; 1993.
-----. Don Kişot’tan Bugüne Roman. Istanbul: İletişim Yayınları, 2000.
Sieber, Harry. The Picaresque. London: Methuen, 1997.
Tanpınar, Ahmet Hamdi. Ondokuzuncu Asır Türk Edebiyatı Tarihi. Istanbul: Çağlayan Kitabevi,
1976.
Tarih ve Toplum: Ahmet Mithat’ın Dünyası. Special Issue on Ahmet Mithat. 34: 203 (November
2000).
186
Kaynaklar
Alpkaya, Gökçen. AGİK Sürecinden AGİT’e İnsan Hakları. İstanbul: Kavram, 1996.
Aşçıoğlu, Çetin. Doğru ve Güvenli Yargılanma Hakkımız Var. Ankara: Adalet Matbaacılık, 1995.
Avrupa İnsan Hakları Yargısı ve Türkiye. İzmir Barosu İnsan Hakları Hukuku ve Hukuk Araştırmaları
Merkezi Yayınları No. 9. İzmir: İzmir Barosu,
Batum, Süheyl. Avrupa İnsan Hakları Mahkemesi ve Türkiye. İstanbul: Kavram Yayınları, 1996.
Cihan, Erol, ve Feridun Yenisey. Ceza Muhakemesi Hukuku. İstanbul: Beta, 1996.
Centel, Nur. “Avrupa İnsan Hakları Sözleşmesine Göre Mahkemelerin Bağımsızlığı ile Tarafsızlığı
ve Türk Hukuku.” Prof. Dr. Nurullah Kunter’e Armağan. İstanbul: y.y., 1998.
Çavuşoğlu, Naz. İHAS ve Avrupa Topluluk Hukukunda Temel Hak ve Hürriyetler Üzerine. Ankara
Üniversitesi Siyasal Bilimler Fakültesi İnsan Hakları Merkezi Özel Dizi No. 1. Ankara:
Ankara Üniversitesi, 1994.
Demirkol, Ferman. Yargı Bağımsızlığı. İstanbul: Kazancı, 1991.
Dinç, Güney. “İşkenceye Karşı Savunma Hakkı.” Balıkesir Barosu Dergisi No. 5-6, 1988.
Doğru, Osman. İnsan Hakları Avrupa İçtihatları. İstanbul: Beta, 1997.
Donay, Süheyl. İnsan Hakları Açısından Sanığın Hakları ve Türk Hukuku. İstanbul: Fakülteler
Matbaası, 1982.
Dönmezer, Sulhi. “Suçsuzluk Karinesi Üzerine Düşünceler.” Prof. Dr. Nurullah Kunter’e Armağan.
İstanbul: y.y., 1998.
Ekinci, Adnan. “DGM Cephesinde Yeni Bir Şey Yok.” Açık Sayfa No. 16, 1988.
Erem, Faruk. Diyalektik Açıdan Ceza Yargılaması Hukuku. Ankara: Işın, 1986.
European Court of Human Rights. 1996 Sonrası Kararları. http://www.dhcour.coe.fr. 20 Mart 2000.
Fawcett, J. E. S. The Application of the European Convention on Human Rights. Oxford ve Londra:
Oxford University Press, 1987.
Gölcüklü, Feyyaz. “Avrupa İnsan Hakları Divanı İçtihadına Göre Doğru Yargılama ve Kanıtların
Değerlendirilmesi.” İnsan Hakları Merkezi Dergisi 2: 2 (1994):
----- ve Şeref Gözübüyük. Avrupa İnsan Hakları Sözleşmesi ve Uygulaması. Ankara: Turhan, 1994.
Harris, D. J., M. O’Boyle, ve C. Warbrick. Law of the European Convention on Human Rights.
: Butterworts, 1995.
İzmir Barosu Çeteleşmeye Karşı Hukukun Üstünlüğü Komisyonu. Devlet Güvenlik Mahkemeleri
Hakkında Rapor. www.izmirbarosu.org.tr/mevzuatbankasi/rapor1. 24 Şubat 2000.
Jacobs, Francis G., ve C. A. Robin White. The European Convention on Human Rights. Oxford:
Clarendon Press, 1996.
Kapani, Münci. İcra Organı Karşısında Hakimlerin İstiklali. Ankara:
, 1956.
Kardaş, Ümit. Hakimlerin Bağımsızlığı Açısından Askeri Mahkemelerin Kuruluşu ve Yetkileri.
İstanbul: Kazancı, 1997.
Kibar, Recep. Türk Hukukunda Sanık Hakları.
: Yetkin, 1997.
Kunter, Nurullah. Ceza Muhakemesi Hukuku. İstanbul: Sermet, 1989.
-----, ve Feridun Yenisey. Muhakeme Hukuku Dalı Olarak Ceza Muhakemesi Hukuku. İstanbul:
Beta, 1998.
Nowak, Manfred. U.N. Covenant on Civil and Political Rights CCPR Commentary. Kehl, Germany, and
Arlington, VA: N. P. Engel, 1993.
Öztürk, Bahri. Uygulamalı Ceza Muhakemesi Hukuku. Ankara: Seçkin, 2000.
Özbudun, Ergun. Türk Anayasa Hukuku. Ankara:
, 1995.
Reid, Karen. A Practitioner’s Guide to the European Convention of Human Rights. Londra: Sweet
& Maxwell, 1998.
Robertson, A. H., ve J. G. Merrils. Human Rights in Europe. Manchester: Manchester University
Press, 1995.
Sencer, Muzaffer. İnsan Hakları: Ana Kuruluşlar ve Belgeler. Ankara:
, 1986.
Schroder,
, ve
Yenisey. Dürüst Yargılanma Hakkı. İstanbul: Alkım, 1997.
-----, -----, ve
Peukert. Ceza Muhakemesinde ‘Fair Trial’ İlkesi. İstanbul: İstanbul Barosu
CMUK Uygulama Servisi Yayınları,
.
187
Shorts, Edwin, ve Claire de Than. Civil Liberties: Legal Principles of Individual Freedom. Londra:
Sweets & Maxwell, 1998.
Tanör, Bülent. Türkiye’nin İnsan Hakları Sorunu. İstanbul: Yay. Yok, 1998.
Toroslu, Nevzat. “Hukuka Aykırı Deliller Sorunu.” Prof. Dr. Hamide Topçuoğlu’na Armağan. Ankara,
1995.
Tosun, Öztekin. Türk Suç Muhakemesi Hukuku Dersleri. Cilt I. 4. Bas. İstanbul: Acar Matbaa, 1984.
Turmangil, Civan. “AİHS’nin 25. Maddesi ve Türkiye Örneği: Bireysel Başvuru Hakkının
Kullanılmasında 7. Yıla Doğru.” Çağdaş Hukuk 4: 42-43 (1995):
Ünal, Şeref. Avrupa İnsan Hakları Sözleşmesi. Ankara: TBMM, 2001.
Versan, Rauf. “Adil Yargılanma Üzerine.” İstanbul Barosu Dergisi 64: 1-2-3 (1990). .
Yenisey, Feridun. “Sanık Haklarının Anayasa Mahkemesi Tarafından Korunması.” Prof. Dr. Nurullah
Kunter’e Armağan. İstanbul, 1998.
Yıldırım, Ali. “Sanığın Susma Hakkı.” Ankara Barosu Dergisi 5-6 (1988).
Yurtcan, Erdener. “Ceza Yargılaması Kurallarında 4229 Sayılı Yasayla 12 Mart Tarihinde Yapılan
Değişiklikler Ne Getirdi?” İstanbul Barosu Dergisi 1 (Mart 1997).
Yüce, Turhan Tufan. “Sanığın Savunması ve Korunması Açısından Ceza Soruşturmasının Hümanist
İlkeleri.” Türkiye Barolar Birliği Dergisi 1 (1988).
Zabunoğlu, Yahya. “Adil Yargılanma Hakkı ve Adil Yargılama Yapma Görevi.” Yeni Türkiye. Yargı
Reformu Özel Sayısı 10 (1996).
188
Appendix N
Sample list of references in the Social Science Style: Psychology
References
Albert, K. A. & Luzzo, C. A. (1999) The Role of Perceived Barriers in Career
Development: A Social Cognitive Perspective. Journal of Counselling and Development,
77, 431-437.
Aycan, Z. (1998). HR Araştırma: Kadınların İş Hayatında Başarılarını Etkileyen
Faktörler. Human Resources, 7, 82-90
Aycan, Z & Paşa, S. F. (2000). Motivayon, Kariyer Seçimi ve İdeal Lider
Özellikleri. Retrieved March 14, 2001 from the World Wide Web:
http://www.insankaynaklari.com/bireyler/trends/roportaj/kocuniversite.asp
Bandura, A. (1995). Exercise of personal and collective efficacy in changing
societies. In A. Bandura (Ed), Self-efficacy in changing societies (pp 132-25). USA:
Cambridge.
Bayrak, S. & Yücel, A. (2000). Kadın Cinsiyeti, Yöneticilik ve Güç bir Paradoks
mu? Retrieved March 14, 2001 from the World Wide Web:
http://yonetim2000.erciyes.edu.tr/kongrecd/dokumanlar/icindekiler2.htm
Betz, N. E. (1994). Self-concept theory in career development and counselling.
The Career Development Quarterly, 43, 32-42.
Black, N. K. (1997). Surprise! Perhaps men aren’t from Mars and women aren’t
from Venus. The Journal of Sex Research, 34, 59-60.
Bonett, R. M. (1994). Marital status and sex: Impact of career self-efficacy.
Journal of Counselling and Development, 73, 187- 196.
Brandser, G. C. (1996). Women-the new heroes of the business world?. Women in
Management Review, 11, 3-18.
Brown, B. L. (1999). Self-Efficacy Beliefs and Career Development (Report No.
ED-99-CO-0013). Columbus, OH: ERIC Clearinghouse on Adult Career and Vocational
Education. (ERIC Document Reproduction Service No. ED 429 187). Retrieved January
04, 2001 from the World Wide Web: http://ericacve.org/fulltext.asp
DeCenzo, D. A. & Robbins, S. P. (1999). Human Resources Management (6th ed.).
Wiley and Sons, USA.
Demirel, G. (1997). Cam Tavan Sendromu. Capital, 8, 84-87
Dickerson, A. & Taylor, M. A. (2000). Self-limiting behaviour in women. Group
and Organization Management, 25, 191-210.
Ecevit, F. Y. (1995). The Status and Changing Forms of Women’s Labour in The
Urban Economy. In Ş. Tekeli (Ed), Women in Modern Turkish Society: A Reader (pp 8188). London: Zed Books Ltd.
Hackett, G. (1995). Self-efficacy in career choice and development. In A.
Bandura (Ed), Self-efficacy in changing societies (pp 132-25). USA: Cambridge.
Hackett, G. (1997). Promise and Problems in Theory and Research on Women’s
Career Development: Comment on Lucas (1997), Richie et.al. (1997), McCracken and
Weitzman (1997), Rainey and Borders (1997), and Schaefers, Epperson, and Nauta (1997).
Journal of Counselling Psychology, 44, 184-188.
Kabasakal, H. (1998). A Profile of Top Women Managers in Turkey. In Zehra F.
Arat (Ed), Deconstructing Images of “The Turkish Women”(pp225-239). New York:
Macmillan Press.
Kılıç, M. (1998). Kariyer Dünyası, 1, 22-27
Kumboltz, J.D. (1994) The career beliefs inventory. Journal of Counselling and
Development, 72, 424-429.
Lent, R. W. & Brown, S. D. (1996). Social cognitive approach to career
development: An overview. The Career Development Quarterly, 44, 310-319.
Linehan, M & Walsh, J. S. (1999). Senior female international managers: breaking
the glass border. Women in Management Review, 14, 264-275.
Long, B. C. (1995). Women and Work-Place Stress (Report No. RR93002004).
Greensboro, NC: ERIC Clearinghouse on Counseling and Student Services, and Ottowa,
189
Ontario: Canadian Guidance and Counselling Foundation. (ERIC Document Reproduction
Service No. ED 401 496). Retrieved January 04, 2001 from the World Wide Web:
http://ericacve.org/fulltext.asp
Luzzo, D. A. & Hutcheson, K. G. (1996). Causal attributions and sex differences
associated with perceptions of occupational barriers. Journal of Counselling and
Development, 75, 124-135.
Luzzo, D. A. & McWhirter, E. H. (2001). Sex and Ethnic Differences in the
Perception of Educational and Career-Related Barriers and Levels of Coping Efficacy.
Journal of Counselling and Development, 79, 61-68.
Luzzo, D. A. (1995). Gender differences in collage students’ career maturity and
perceived barriers in career development. Journal of Counselling and Development, 73,
319-317.
Mc Whirter, E. H.; Torres, D.; and Rasheed, S. (1998) Assessing barriers to
women's career adjustment. Journal of Career Assessment, 4, 449.
McKeen, C. A. & Bu, N. (1998). Career and life expectations of Chinese business
students: the effects of gender. Women in Management Review, 13: 5, 171-183. Abstract.
OECD – Organisation for Economic Co-operation and Development (1998). The
Future of Female-Dominated Occupations. France:OECD Publications.
Pervin, L. A.& John, O. P. (1997). Personality: Theory and Research. USA: John
Wiley and Sons, Inc.
Raludi, M. A. (1992). The Psychology of Women. New York: WCB Brown and
Benchmark Press.
Rosenberg (1965). Society and the Adolescent self image. Princeton, NI: Princeton
University Press.
Rosenberg, M (1979). Conceiving the self. New York: Basic Books.
Russell, J. E. A. & Burgess, J. R. D. (1998). Success and women’s career
adjustment. Journal of Career Assessment, 6, 365-379.
Schermerhorn, J. R.; Hunt, J. G.; and Osborn, R. N. (1997). Organisational
Behaviour (6th ed.). Canada: Wiley and Sons.
Schwarzer, R. (Ed.) (1992). Self-efficacy: Thought control of action. Washington,
DC: Hemisphere. Retrieved January 11, 2001 from the World Wide Web:
http://userpage.fu.berlin.de/~health/turk.htm
Stanley, K. D. & Murphy, M. R. (1997). A comparison of general self-efficacy
with self-esteem. Genetic, Social & General Psychology Monographs, 123, 81.
Sullivan, K. R. & Mahalik, J. R. (2000). Increasing Career Self-Efficacy for
Women: Evaluating a Group Intervention. Journal of Counselling and Development, 78,
54-65.
Swanson, J. L. & Parcover, J. A. (1998). Annual review: Practice and research in
career counselling and development-1997. The Career Development Quarterly, 47, 98-134.
T.C. Başbakanlık Devlet Planlama Teşkilatı Müsteşarlığı (1994). 7.5 Yıllık
Kalkınma Planı Özel İhtisas Komisyonu Raporu: Kadın. DPT:2358-OİK:426, Ankara 1994,
p. 13-19.
Turkel, A. R. (2000). The good girl grows up: Gender and Self-esteem. Journal of
the American Academy of Psychoanalysis, 28, 147-160.
Udall, S. & Hiltrop, J. M. (1996). The Accidental Manager: Surviving the
Transition from Professional to Manager. USA: Prentice Hall.
Unger, R: & Crawford, M. (1996). Chapter 5: Doing Gender: Sex, Status and
Power. Women and Gender: A Feminist Psychology (2nd ed). MC Graw-Hill
Ward, V. G. (1995). Career Counseling of Girls and Women: Guidelines for
Professional Practice. (Report No. RR93002004) Greensboro, NC: ERIC Clearinghouse on
Counseling and Student Services, and Ottowa, Ontario: Canadian Guidance and
Counselling Foundation. (ERIC Document Reproduction Service No. ED 414 524).
Retrieved January 04, 2001 from the World Wide Web: http://ericacve.org/fulltext.asp
Westen, Drew (1996). Psychology : Mind, Brain, and Culture. USA: John Wiley
and Sons, Inc.
190
Appendix O
Sample list of references in the Social Science Style: Sociology
References
Primary
Deliorman, Altan, and İbrahim Kafesoğlu. 1976. Tarih Lise 1 [History Textbook Lycée 1].
Istanbul: Devlet Kitapları.
Deliorman, Altan. Lise 1 Tarih Ders Kitabı [Lycée 1 History Textbook]. 1994. Istanbul:
Bayrak Basım, Yayım, Tanıtım.
Deliorman, Altan. Genel Türk Tarihi 2 [General Turkish History 2]. 1997. Istanbul: Bayrak
Basım, Yayım, Tanıtım.
Deliorman, Altan. Tarih Lise 3 [History Lycée 3]. 1991. Istanbul: Bayrak Basım, Yayım,
Tanıtım.
Oktay, Emin, and Niyazi Akşit. Tarih Lise1 [History Textbook Lycée 1]. 1988. Istanbul:
Remzi Kitabevi.
Oktay, Emin. Tarih Lise 2 [History Textbook Lycée 2]. 1987. Istanbul: Atlas Yayınevi.
Oktay, Emin. Tarih Lise 3 [History Textbbook Lycée 3]. n.d. Istanbul: Atlas Yayınevi.
Öztuna, Yılmaz. Tarih Lise 3 [Lycée 3 History Textbook]. 1976. Istanbul: Devlet Kitapları.
Turhal, Yüksel, and Faruk Sümer. Tarih Lise 1 [History Textbook Lycée 1]. N.d. Istanbul:
Ders Kitapları Anonim Şirketi.
Turhal, Yüksel. Liseler İçin Tarih 2 [History Textbook For Lycée 2]. 1987. Istanbul: Ders
Kitapları Anonim Şirketi.
Turhal, Yüksel. Tarih Lise 3 [History Textbook Lycée 3]. 1990. Istanbul: Ders Kitapları
Anonim Şirketi.
Secondary
Anderson, Benedict. Imagined Communities. 1983; 1991. London and New York: Verso.
Behar, Büşra Ersanlı. İktidar ve Tarih. 1992. Istanbul: Afa Yayınları, 1992.
Berktay, Ali, and Halil Tuncer, ed. Tarih Eğitimi ve Tarihte “Öteki” Sorunu. 1998.Istanbul:
Tarih Vakfı Yurt Yayınları.
Bostancı, M. Naci. Bir Kollektif Bilinç Olarak Milliyetçilik. 1999. Istanbul: Doğan
Kitapçılık.
Bozdoğan, Sibel, and Reşat Kasaba, ed. Pp. 188-200 in Türkiye’de Modernleşme ve Ulusal
Kimlik. Trans. Nurettin Elhüseyni. 1998; 1999. Istanbul: Tarih Vakfı Yurt Yayınları.
Chatterjee, Partha. Milliyetçi Düşünce ve Sömürge Dünyası. Trans. Sami Oğuz. 1996.
Istanbul: İletişim Yayınları.
Copeaux, Ettiene. Türk Tarih Tezinden Türk-İslam Sentezine. Trans. Ali Berktay. 1998.
Istanbul: Tarih Vakfı Yurt Yayınları.
Cuff, E.C, Sharrock, W.W, Francis, D.W. Perspectives in Sociology. 1979; 1998. London:
Routledge.
Doğan, Nuri. Ders Kitapları ve Sosyalleşme ( 1876 – 1918). 1994. Istanbul: Bağlam
Yayınları.
Gellner, Ernest. Nations and Nationalism. 1983: 1994. Oxford and Newyork: Blackwell
Publishers.
Georgeon, François. Türk Milliyetçiliğinin Kökenleri: Yusuf Akçura. Trans. Alev Er. 1999.
Istanbul: Tarih Vakfı Yurt Yayınları.
Guibernau, Montserrat. Milliyetçilikler: 20. Yüzyılda Ulusal Devlet ve Milliyetçilikler.
Trans. Neşe Nur Domaniç. 1997. Istanbul: Sarmal Yayınları.
Güvenç, Bozkurt. Türk Kimliği: Kültür Tarihinin Kaynakları. 1993; 2000. Istanbul: Remzi
Kitabevi.
Helvacıoğlu, Firdevs. Ders Kitaplarında Cinsiyetçilik: 1928 - 1995. 1996. Istanbul: Kaynak
Yayınları.
191
Hobsbawm, Eric, and Terence Ranger, ed. The Invention of Tradition. 1983; 1997.
Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.
Hobsbawm, Eric. 1780’den Günümüze Milletler ve Milliyetçilik: Program, Mit, Gerçeklik.
Trans. Osman Akınhay. 1993; 1995. Istanbul: Ayrıntı Yayınları.
Hutchinson, John, Smith, Anthony D. Nationalism. 1994. Oxford and New York: Oxford
University Press.
Jusdanis, Gregory. Gecikmiş Modernlik ve Estetik Kültür: Milli Edebiyatın İcat Edilişi.
Trans. Tuncay Birkan. 1998. Istanbul: Metis Yayınları.
Kaplan, İsmail. Türkiye’de Milli Eğitim İdeolojisi. 1999. Istanbul: İletişim Yayınları.
Martin, James. Gramsci’s Political Analysis. 1998. London: St. Martin’s Press.
Özbaran, Salih, ed. Tarih Öğretimi ve Ders Kitapları. 1998. Izmir: Ege Üniversitesi
Yayınları.
Özbaran, Salih. Tarih, Tarihçi ve Toplum. 1997. Istanbul: Tarih Vakfı Yurt Yayınları.
Özkırımlı, Umut. Milliyetçilik Kuramları. 1999. Istanbul: Sarmal Yayınları.
Poulton, Hugh. Top Hat, Grey Wolf and Crescent. 1997. London: Hurst & Company.
Smith, Anthony D. The Ethnic Origins of Nations. 1986; 1996. Cambridge: Blackwell
Publishers.
Smith, Anthony. Milli Kimlik. Trans. Bahadır Sina Şener. 1994; 1999. Istanbul: İletişim
Yayınları.
Smith, Anthony. Nations and Nationalism in a Global Era. 1996. Oxford and Cambridge:
Polity Press.
Tekeli, İlhan. Tarih Bilinci ve Gençlik. 1998. Istanbul: Tarih Vakfı Yurt Yayınları.
Üstel, Füsun. İmparatorluktan Ulus-Devlete Türk Milliyetçiliği: Türk Ocakları (19121931). 1997. Istanbul: İletişim Yayınları.
Yıldız, Ahmet. Ne Mutlu Türküm Diyebilene: Türk Ulusal Kimliğinin Etno – Seküler
Sınırları ( 1919 – 1938). 2001. Istanbul: İletişim Yayınları.
192
Appendix P
Dissertation Topics from Previous Years
Dissertations in the Faculty of Economic and Administrative Sciences
The complete list of Bachelor’s and Master’s dissertations produced since the academic year 1997-1998 in the
Departments of Business Administration, Economics, and International Relations of the Faculty of Economic
and Administrative Sciences may be found in the İstanbul Bilgi Üniversitesi Faaliyet Raporu 1996-2001 (pp.
109-26) or seen in the stacks of the University Library.
Dissertations in the Faculty of Science and Letters
Department of Comparative Literature
1999-2000
2000-2001
Kemal Boşnak
Apocalypse How? A Look at William Burroughs
Through the Eyes of William Shakespeare
A. Kerim Değermenci
Fathers and Daughters: The Abandoned Heroine and the
Rise of the Novel in Turkey and England
Ece Eraslan
The Question of the Ending: A Survey Through the NineteenthCentury English Novel
Şebnem Hilâl Kaya
The Analysis of Musullu Süleyman as a Picaresque Novel and
Ahmet Mithat’s Other Picaros
Muhammet Topaloğlu
Comedy and Subtext in Shakespeare’s Comedy of Errors
N. Kıvılcım Yavuz
‘A souerayne chastyte’: Zenobia as Metaphor of the
Educated Woman in Pizan and Elyot,with Excursions into
Boccaccio, Chaucer, Erasmus
Pınar Yurtan
Popular Culture and Fiction, Love and Marriage in Barbara
Cartland and Kerime Nadir’s Works
Department of Computer Science
2000-2001
Sandra Abudaram
Z-Transform Design of One Type of Sampled Data Systems
Hakan Pehlivan
Comparison of the Database System Applications Performance
on Linux and Windows NT Operating Systems
Karcan Yayöz
Z-Transform Analysis of One Discrete Time Control System
Department of Mathematics
2000-2001
Salih Azgın
Algebraic Geometry
Ayhan Günaydın
Homologic Algebra
Haluk Şengün
Classification of Rod Systems of Semi-Simple Lie Algebras
193
Department of Psychology
2000-2001
Hande Aksoy
Self-Complexity and Depression
Tuba G. Eren
Religion and Personality: A Study on University Students
Ceren Musaağaoğlu
Meaning and Importance of Music Listening for Turkish
Undergraduates
Nesli Demircioğlu
The Determinants of Job Satisfaction among Primary
School Teachers
Life Satisfaction & Who Has It?
Ayşegül Bora
Ceyda Aymir
Female Undergraduates’ Perceptions of Career Related
Barriers and Coping-Efficacy Beliefs
İpek Özbaşar
A Study Regarding the Relationship Between Eating
Attitudes, Self-Esteem and Self-Perception
Ayşin Merdal
Language Development of a Child with Autism: A Case
Study
Canan Küçükcan
The Level of Exhaustion for Male and Female Brokers
Burcu Akman
Dyadic Adjustment in Married Couples
Gülden Şebnem Yaşar
Attachment Styles and Coping Strategies: A Study on the
Effects of Attachment Styles on Coping Strategies
Engin F. Palabıyık
Differences in Intimacy Between Male and Female
University Students’ Close Relationships
Karin Natan
Attitudes Towards Gay Men and Lesbians: Homophobia
Dilek Kızılcık
Motivations for Internet Use: An Analysis of Online
Consumer Behavior among Turkish University Students
Burcu Satganoğlu
An Inqury About Social Support, Self-Efficacy and
Burnout Levels in Employed Women
Zeynep Göktuna
The Effect of Gender on Romantic Relationships
Aylin Kızıler
Sexual Double Standard and Attitudes Toward Premarital
Sexual Permissiveness Among Turkish University Students
Department of Sociology
2000-2001
Fatih Keçelioğlu
Considering Irigaray from Cultural Feminism to Rhizomatic
Feminism
194
Ayşe Burcu Sümer
The Changing Position of Women in the Late Ottoman Empire
in Terms of Educational and Family Life
İbrahim Toraman
Nationalism in History Textbooks: A Comparative Study 19601980
Can Generalfeyzioğlu
An Interpretation of a Turkish Independent Record Company
Dissertations in the Faculty of Communication
Department of Communication/Media and Communications Systems Programme
2000-2001
Volkan Akdamar
The Conflict Between Turkish Television Documentaries,
Alternative Documentaries in the Light of Subjectivity and
Reproduction
Eser Akdeniz
The Change in Nationalist Newspapers in Turkey in the Last
Three Decades 1970-2000
Onur Altuğ
Freedom of Expression in Turkish Electronic Journalism
Evrim Z. Aras
Türkan Şoray: The Image She Created
Lütfiye Berberoğlu
Comparing Classical Vampire Movies versus Modernized Ones
Tuba Biroğlu
The Reasons Why Feminism Has Not Developed in Turkey
Ufuk Coşkun
News Programming on TV – “32. Gün” as an example
Gülcan Çağlar
The Comparison of the Village Institutes in Turkey and the Open
University in England as Alternative Public Pedagogies
Berk Çoker
Media Influence on Soccer Hooliganism
Nihan Devecioğlu
Analysis of the Rise of Voyeur/ism on Television focusing on
the Reality Show “Big Brother”
Ayşe Dirik
Can Dündar’s Documentaries: Televising History in the Turkish
Context
Diğde Eşki
Star Images of Marilyn Monroe, Rita Hayworth and Ava
Gardner in Classical Hollywood Cinema (1940-1960) and the
Affects of the Studio System
Melisa Gerçil
The Comparison of Tabloidization of News in Britain and
Turkey
Ece G. Gökakın
Comparative Study of Broadcasting Regulatory Bodies of
Turkey, USA and Italy.
Işıl Göksu
Election Campaigning Through Newspapers: Representation of
April 18th 1999 Elections in Turkish National Newspapers
195
Neslihan Güçlühan
Effects of the Patriarchy on the Women Images in the “Feminine
Singers” Video Clips
Gizem D. Gülşen
Comparing and Contrasting the Two Newspapers “Cumhuriyet”
and “Radikal”
Pelin İlgün
Position of Women Towards Technology. Estrangement of
Women from the Internet
Alper T. İnce
The End of the Nation State as Global Will and Antiglobal
Movements as Counter Standings
D. Gamze İstanbulluoğlu The Status of Women in Doğan Group’s Televisions and
Newspapers
Seyhan Karasu
A Comparison Between Fan Culture of Popular “Heros” like
Orhan Gencebay and Müslüm Gürses
Erem Kargül
The Women of Almodovar
Emre Kavlak
Soap Operas: Dallas and the Production of Culture, Identity and
Meaning
Derya Keskin
Analysis of Müjde Ar’s Sexual Image in the Light of her Movies
Murat Kızıltuğ
The Commercialization and Industrialization of Media in Turkey
and in the World
Beril Kösekul
70s Fashion Revival
Erdinç Mutlu
Arabesque Music from the 1970’s Till Today and the Change in
Demographic Structure in Istanbul
Burcu Ongan
The Harmful Effect of Exhibiting Children Who Are Victims of
Violence on TV
Şebnem Özbe
The Comparison of Some Aspects of Real Life and Chat on
Relations
Emel Pakkan
The Comparison Between Male and Female Columnists Through
Content and Discourse
Seda Topuzlu
Glam Rock as a Subcultural Phenomenon
Ozan Sönmezışık
Hizbullah in the Turkish Press
Sibel Şahbudak
Comparison of the Public and Private Broadcasting Services in
Terms of Employee Practices: TRT and Kanal D
Özlem Ünsal
“Bobos” as the Members of a New Lifestyle and the Meritocrats
of the Information Age
196
Ceylan Yurdakuler
Fetish Objects in Cronenberg’s Cinema
Dissertations in the Faculty of Law
2000-2002
O. Ferruh Ağan
Gemi İpoteği
F. Yıldız Akev
Doğal Hukuk’un Genel Prensipleri
Deniz Arslan
Demokratik Sendikacılık ve Sendika Özgürlüğü
İbrahim Arslan
Tahkim Sözleşmesi
Serdar Böler
Tanınmış Markalar
İnci Çınar
Avrupa İnsan Hakları Sözleşmesi Kapsamında Adil Yargılanma
Hakkı
Ş. Selçuk Demirbulak
Avrupa Topluluğu ve Avrupa Birliği Sosyal Politika ve Sosyal
Hukuku
Mehtap Dirgen
Anayasal Açıdan Temel Hak ve Özgürlüklerin Sınırlandırılması
Gülüm Dora
Avrupa Birliğine Tam Üye Adayı Olan Devletlerin Siyasi
Nitelikteki Kopenhag Kriterlerini Yerine Getirme Uygulamaları
Başak Işıklı
Domain Adları
Güven Kahraman
Elektronik ve Dijital İmza
N. Kaan Karcılıoğlu
Rekabet Hukukunda Birleşme, Devralma ve Ortak Hareketler
Ahmet Kavak
İslamda Rasyonalizm ve Rasyonalistler
Mustafa Korkmaz
Marksist Öğretide İnsan Hakları
Dilek Kurtuluş
Denize Elverişlilik
Selim Levi
Ceza Hukukunda Kanunilik Prensibi
Erkan Özdemir
Mülkiyetin Bir İnsan Hakkı Olarak İncelenmesi
Özlem Özdemir
DGM’lerde İnsan Haklarının İhlali
Didem Özgür
Kara Paranın Aklanması Suçu
Mehmet Akif Poroy
AİHM’de Türkiye Aleyhine Açılmış Davalar
Ruken Fatoş Seyyar
TCK’nın 312. Maddesi
Şefik Şimşek
TCK Açısından Bilişim Suçları
Kubilay Tekgül
İhtiyati Haciz
197
A. Sibel Telgezer
AİHM Kararlarının TCK Açısından Uygulanabilirliği
Funda Üçkardeş
Toplu Menfaat Uyuşmazlıklarının Çözümünde Barışçı Çözüm
Yolu Olarak Arabuluculuk
Abdülkadir Yağız
Sendikaların Yönetime Katılması
198
16. Bibliography of Works Quoted and Consulted in the Preparation of This
Guide
16.1 Works Quoted
The numbers in bold indicate page numbers in this Guide where citations from the listed
sources are located. For appendix materials, the appendix letter is given instead of page
number. All quotations from the works of William Shakespeare are from the Riverside
Shakespeare, ed. G. Blakemore Evans, et. al. Boston: Houghton Mifflin, 1974. Passages
for which no source is indicated were invented by the author. Some of the material quoted
from others’ work was modified slightly to make for a sharper example; where excessive
manipulation was necessary, material was drawn from author’s own work. Upon the
request of the Psychology Department, numerous examples for references of standard
works in psychology were drawn from the Publication Manual of the American
Psychological Association, 4th ed. (Washington, DC: APA, 1994). These have not been
individually indicated below. 21 Thomas M. Greene, The Light in Troy: Imitation and
Discovery in Renaissance Poetry (New Haven and London: Yale University Press, 1982).
Cemal Bali Akal, Modern Düşüncenin Doğuşu: İspanyol Altın Çağı, 2. bas. (Ankara: Dost
Kitabevi, 1997). 21-22 Bozkurt Güvenç, “Tarihi Perspektifte Kimlik Sorunu Özdeşimlerini
Belirleyen Bazı Etkenler,” in Tarih Eğitimi ve Tarihte Öteki Sorunu, ed. Ali Berktay and
Can Tuncer (Istanbul: Tarih Vakfı Yurt Yayınları, 1998). 32 Sanatçı Hakları, ed. Deniz
Şengel and Gülsün Karamustafa (Istanbul: PSD-AIAP, 1992). The Notebooks of Leonardo
Da Vinci. Compiled and Edited from the Original manuscripts by Jean Paul Richter (1883;
New York: Dover Publications, 1970), Vol. I, Plate V. 33 Morris Kline, Mathematics in
Western Culture (London, Oxford, and New York: Oxford University Press, 1980. 34
Middle East Technical University, Instructions for Preparation of Theses (Ankara: METU,
1995). 45 Eric Cochrane, Historians and Historiography in the Italian Renaissance
(Chicago and London: The University of Chicago Press). 45-46 Brenda Spatt, Writing
from Sources, 3rd ed. (New York: St. Martin’s Press, 1991). 50 N. Kıvılcım Yavuz, “ ‘A
souerayne chastyte’: Zenobia as Metaphor of the Educated Woman in Pizan and Elyot with
Excursions into Boccaccio, Chaucer, Erasmus,” B.A. Diss., İstanbul Bilgi U, 2001. 54
Ahmed Haşim, “Bir Günün Sonunda Arzu,” Yunus Emre’den Âşık Veysel’e Türk
Klâsikleri, ed. Orhan F. Köprülü (Istanbul: Dâsar, 1974). Charles Dickens, Great
Expectations, ed. Angus Calder (Harmondsworth, UK: Penguin, 1965; 1977). 55 Aziz
Nesin, Bişey Yap Met (Istanbul: Yankı Yayınları, 1973). Marshall McLuhan, The
Gutenberg Galaxy: The Making of Typographic Man (1962; New York: The New
American Library-Mentor, 1969). Jonathan Clarke, “The Conceptual Poverty of U.S.
Foreign Policy,” Atlantic September 1993. 56 McLuhan, Gutenberg Galaxy. William
McWhirter, “Back on the Fast Track,” Time 13 December 1993. 57 Inglis F. Bell and
Jennifer Gallup, A Reference Guide to English, American, and Canadian Literature
(Vancouver: University of British Columbia Press, 1971). 57-58 Hester Eisenstein,
Contemporary Feminist Thought: An Assessment (Boston: G. K. Hall, 1983). 59 Deniz
Şengel, Dickens ve Sidney: İngilterede Ulusal Edebiyatın Kuruluşu (Istanbul: İstanbul
Bilgi Üniversitesi Yayınları, 2001). 59-60 Paul Oskar Kristeller, Renaissance Thought and
the Arts (Princeton, NJ: Princeton University Press, 1965; 1980). 60 Cochrane, Historians
and Historiography in the Italian Renaissance. Şebnem Hilâl Kaya, “The Analysis of
Musullu Süleyman as a Picaresque Novel and Ahmet Mithat’s Other Picaros,” B.A. Diss.,
İstanbul Bilgi U, 2001. 61 Onur Bilge Kula, “Johann Wolfgang Goethe’nin Bazı
Yapıtlarında Tarihsellik-Yazınsallık Açısından Türk Ögeler,” Tarih ve Toplum 33: 198
(June 2000). Robert J. Clements, The Poetry of Michelangelo (New York: New York
University Press, 1966). Sara Sturm, “The Poet-Persona in the Canzoniere,” in Francis
Petrarch, Six Centuries Later. A Symposium, ed. Aldo Scaglione (Chapel Hill, NC, ve
199
Chicago: The Newberry Library, 1975). Robert M. Durling, ed. and trans. Petrarch’s Lyric
Poems: The ‘Rime Sparse’ and Other Lyrics (Cambridge, Mass., ve Londra: Harvard
University Press, 1976). 95-96 Joseph Gibaldi, MLA Handbook for Writers of Research
Papers, 4th ed. (New York: The Modern Language Association of America, 1995). 128-29
Curtin University, Harvard Referencing Guide, http://lisweb.curtin.edu.au/guides/
handouts/ harvard, 18 December 2000. Appendices: Entries for which no bibliographic
information has been given are İstanbul Bilgi University dissertations dated June 2001:
F Faculty of Science and Letters: Yavuz, “ ‘A souerayne chastyte’.” Sandra Abudaram,
“Z-Transform Design of One Type of Sampled Data Systems.” Ceyda Aymir, “Female
Undergraduates’ Perceptions of Career Related Barriers and Coping-Efficacy Beliefs.”
İbrahim Toraman, “Nationalism in History Textbooks: A Comparative Study 1960-1980.”
Faculty of Communication: Erem Kargül, “The Women of Almodavar.” G Aymir,
“Female Undergraduates’ Perceptions.” Edward W. Said, Orientalism (New York: Vintage
Books, 1979). H Faculty of Science and Letters: Yavuz, “ ‘A souerayne chastyte’.”
Abudaram, “Z Transform Design.” Aymir, “Female Undergraduates’ Perceptions.”
Toraman, “Nationalism in History Textbooks.” Faculty of Communication: Kargül, “The
Women of Almodavar.” Faculty of Law: İnci Çınar, “Avrupa İnsan Hakları Sözleşmesi
Kapsamında Adil Yargılanma Hakkı.” I Cecil G. Helman, “ ‘Feed a cold, starve a fever’—
Folk Models of Infection in an English Suburban Community, and Their Relation to
Medical Treatment,” Culture, Medicine, Psychiatry 2: 2 (June 1978). Aymir, “Female
Undergraduates’ Perceptions.” Abudaram, “Z-Transform Design.” J Erwin Panofsky, The
Life and Art of Albrecht Dürer (Princeton, NJ: Princeton University Press, 1955).
Parşömen [special issue on Shakespeare] 2: 2 (Winter 2000). Abudaram, “Z-Transform
Design.” K Blair Worden, The Sound of Virtue: Philip Sidney’s ‘Arcadia’ and Elizabethan
Politics (New Haven and London: Yale University Press, 1996). Neşe Emecan, 1960’tan
Günümüze Türkçe. Bir Sözlük Denemesi (Istanbul: Yapı Kredi Yayınları, 1998). Çınar,
“Avrupa İnsan Hakları Sözleşmesi.” L Yavuz, “ ‘A souerayne chastyte’.” M Kaya, “The
Analysis of Musullu Süleyman as a Picaresque Novel.” Çınar, “Avrupa İnsan Hakları
Sözleşmesi.” N Aymir, “Female Undergraduates’ Perceptions.” O Toraman, “Nationalism
in History Textbooks.”
16.2 Works Consulted
Ataöv, Türkkaya. Bilimsel Araştırma El Kitabı. Ankara: Balkanoğlu Matbaacılık, 1969.
Calfee, R. C., and R. R. Valencia. APA Guide to Preparing Manuscripts for Journal
Publication. Washington, DC: American Psychological Association, 1991.
Curtin University, Harvard Referencing Guide, http://lisweb.curtin.edu.au/ guides/
handouts/harvard. 18 December 2000.
Eyüboğlu, Selim, et al. Bilgi Writing Committee’s User’s Guide to Writing Academic
Papers. Istanbul: İstanbul Bilgi University, 1999; 2000.
Gibaldi, Joseph. The MLA Handbook for Writers of Research Papers. 4th Ed. New York:
Modern Language Association, 1995.
Hairston, Maxine, and John J. Ruszkiewicz. The Scott Foresman Handbook for Writers.
Illinois: Scott, Foresman & Co., 1988.
200
Hellstern, Mark, Gregory M. Scott, and Stephen M. Garrison. The History Student Writer’s
Manual. Upper Saddle River, NJ: Prentice Hall, 1998.
İstanbul Bilgi University. Faculty of Economic and Administrative Sciences Dissertation
Guide. Istanbul: İstanbul Bilgi University, 1998.
Leggett, G., et al. Prentice-Hall Handbook for Writers. n.p.: Prentice-Hall, 1994.
Middle East Technical University, Instructions for Preparation of Theses. Ankara:
METU, 1995.
OWL (Purdue University Online Writing Lab). Formatting in Sociology. 22 December
2000. http://owl.english.purdue.edu/handouts/research/r_docsocio.
---. Using American Psychologşical Association (APA) Format. http://owl.english.purdue.
edu/handouts/research/r_apa.html. 22 December 2000.
---. Using Modern Language Association (MLA) Format. 28 July 2000. http://owl.english.
purdue.edu/Files/33.html.
Publication Manual of the American Psychological Association. 4th Ed. Washington, DC:
APA, 1994.
Sebranek, P., et al. Writers Inc. USA: Write Source Educational Publishing House, 1985.
Spatt, Brenda. Writing from Sources. 3rd Ed. New York: St. Martin’s Press, 1991.
Trimmer, Joseph F. A Guide to MLA Documentation: With an
Turabian,
. The Chicago Manual of Style.
The University of Wisconsin-Madison Writing Center. Writer’s Handbook: Academic
Writing. 12 November 2000. http://www. wisc.edu/writing/Handbook/html.
Woodward, Jeanette, A. Writing Research Papers: Investigating Resources in Cyberspace.
Instructor’s Ed. Illinois, USA: NTC Publishing Group, 1997.
201
Index
202